Sunteți pe pagina 1din 357

Holden VF/WN Sedan, Ute,

Sportwagon Accessories
Installation Manual
Document ID: 2218557 Page 1 of 6

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Interior Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 2218557

Cargo Net Package Installation

TOOLS REQUIRED:

Drill, Marker, 5mm Drill Bit, Masking Tape, 20mm Vinyl Hole Cutter (can be made from hole saw bit
as required) and Trim Release tool.

NOTE:

• When fitting or reinstalling clip-on parts, ensure all retaining clips are still positioned on the
clip extensions. Dislodged clips must be retrieved to prevent vehicle rattles.
• When removing trim from the vehicle, use only sufficient force to release the trim retaining
clips. Take care not to damage the vehicle trim surfaces when removing components.

IMPORTANT:

• Check printed scale on all templates before proceeding.


• A vinyl cutting tool should be used for all soft material (roof lining, floor covering, rear
tailgate trim, etc.) A vinyl cutter can be made by grinding the teeth from a hole-saw
at an angle of about 45 degrees.

FITTING INSTRUCTIONS:

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218557&cellId=21879... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 2218557 Page 2 of 6

1. Refer to figure 1 for the following:


1.1. If fitted, remove the luggage compartment blind.
1.2. Place a dust sheet on the floor of the vehicle to protect the vehicle trim.
1.3. Place masking tape on the roof lining at approximate location where holes will be
made.
1.4. Align the edge of the template (1) with the LHS edge of the centre rear roof trim panel
(2) and the LHS “D” pillar trim panel (3) as indicated on the template.
CAUTION: Use care to place the template in the correct position.
1.5. Mark the centre of the hole location shown on the rear roof template and flip the
template over and repeat on the other side.
1.6. Drill 5mm pilot holes at the marked locations. Take care when breaking through the
roof lining to prevent damaging the roof fixing points directly behind.
1.7. Use a 20mm vinyl cutting tool with mandrel attached to drill out the roof lining.
1.8. Vacuum away all dust & swarf.

2. Refer to figure 2 for the following:


2.1. Insert the trim garnish base (1) in the hole drilled in the roof trim.
2.2. Swing the locking tabs so they lock with the underside of the roof trim.
NOTE: If required unclip surrounding trim to pull the roof lining down from the body
panelling to enable the tabs to swing up.
2.3. Insert the garnish spacer into the trim garnish base until it locks in place.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218557&cellId=21879... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 2218557 Page 3 of 6

2.4. Check roof anchor alignment and thread integrity using an M8x1.25mm thumb bolt
supplied.

3. With the strap adjuster strap buckle to the rear of the vehicle position the pet net crossbar
over the fixing point and use the thumb bolt to fix in position. Refer to figure 3.

4. Refer to figure 4 for the following:


4.1. Clip the hooks on the end of the adjuster straps onto the tie down fixing points.
4.2. Pull down trailing strap below the buckles to take up slack in the net.
IMPORTANT: Do not over tighten as this may deform the net roof cross bar.
4.3. Place the fitting instructions in the glovebox of the vehicle.

Cargo Net Package Installation

PARTS LIST

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

92213801 REAR COMPARTMENT PARTITION 1

PARTITION 1

ROOF TRIM PLUGS 2

THUMB BOLT (M8) 2

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218557&cellId=21879... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 2218557 Page 4 of 6

PARTS LIST

FD1589 FITTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

FD796 PROOF OF WARRANTY CARD 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218557&cellId=21879... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 2218557 Page 5 of 6

Warning:

Never leave a child in the vehicle unattended, particularly in the rear cargo area. The cargo
area should never be used as a play area for children.

Warning:

Strict compliance with Fitting Instructions is essential for correct use of this safety product.

Warning:

Where high tensile threaded fasteners are used, the Compartment Partition must be installed
using the size and grade fasteners specified by Holden.

Warning:

Do not attach (drill, rivet, tie etc.) objects to the front or rear of the Compartment Partition.

Warning:

Secure all rear compartment loads with a restraint system.

Warning:

Be mindful that in an accident, cargo may cause the Compartment Partition to deform towards
passengers.

Warning:

If involved in an accident or accidentally damaged, the Compartment Partition should be


replaced and the anchorages repaired to as new condition.

Warning:

Clean the Compartment Partition with mild soap and water only. Do not use solvents or
chemicals.

Warning:

Do not store outside.

Warning:

Check that all fasteners and straps are tight and re- check periodically.

Warning:

Do not place smaller items, that may bypass the Compartment Partition in the event of heavy
braking or collision, near the edges of the partition.

Warning:

Do not obstruct seat belts or child restraints, or their operation.

Warning:

Do not attach the Compartment Partition to the vehicle using seat, seat belt or child restraint
anchorages.

Warning:

Do not modify Compartment Partition in any way.

Warning:

Do not use this Compartment Partition in any other vehicle for which it is not designed.

Warning:

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218557&cellId=21879... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 2218557 Page 6 of 6

During a collision, moving cargo may damage the seat belts and the tether strap of a child
restraint device or its anchorage. Load should not be in contact with webbing.

Warning:

Long, thin items of cargo should be positioned in the vehicle with the long axis across the
vehicle to minimize the risk of penetration.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218557&cellId=21879... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 2211121 Page 1 of 2

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Interior Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 2211121

Convenience Net Package Installation


Fitting Instructions

1. The convenience net must only be attached to the tie down points fitted to your vehicle,
Refer to the Owner’s Handbook for location of the tie down points fitted to your vehicle.

2. The convenience net can be secured with the hooks on the corners and around the sides of
the net or by using the loops beside each hook depending on the fixing in your vehicle.
Refer to Figure 1, View A.

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2211121&cellId=18859... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 2211121 Page 2 of 2

3. The convenience net can also be doubled over and items placed inside. Refer to Figure 2.
IMPORTANT:
◦ place items centrally between tie-down points as low down and as far
forward in the cargo area as possible.
◦ place long thin items length ways across the vehicle.
◦ ensure that convenience net is protected from items with sharp edges
which may cause damage.
◦ the maximum size of an item for a genuine holden convenience net is 15
kg single mass. that is, if an object weighs 15 kg, only one object is
permitted under the convenience net. for an object exceeding this limit, tie
-down straps are recommended.
◦ never stack loads above the level of the rear seat.
◦ do not use convenience net if rear seat is down.
◦ do not use convenience net if there are visible signs of damage.
4. When convenience net is not in use, roll up and place in a vehicles rear storage
compartment.
5. Place fitting instructions in vehicles glove box.
IMPORTANT: Ensure that there is tension across all edges of the convenience net and
that no items are loose.

Convenience Net Package Installation

PARTS LIST

PART No DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

92115909
CONVENIENCE NET 1
92168897

FD796 PROOF OF WARRANTY CARD 1

FD1169 FITTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2211121&cellId=18859... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 2216380 Page 1 of 3

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Interior Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 2216380

Front Seat Cover Package Installation

FITTING INSTRUCTIONS:

1. Refer to Figure 1 for the following: Press the head restraint adjuster button (1) and lift the
head restraint fully upwards.

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2216380&cellId=18859... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 2216380 Page 2 of 3

2. Refer to Figure 2 for the following:


2.1. To fix the top of the seat insert to the seat, loop the two seat insert hooks (1)
underneath the head restraint adjusters (2) (see view A).
2.2. Tuck the excess lamps wool (3) under the head restraint adjusters.

3. Refer to Figure 3 for the following:


3.1. Raise the seat to the highest position.
3.2. Pass the straps (1) between the seat cushion (2) and the seat back (3).
3.3. Tuck the seat insert (4) 20 - 50mm between the seat cushion and the seat back so
that the back is taut and flat against the seat back.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2216380&cellId=18859... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 2216380 Page 3 of 3

4. Refer to Figure 4 for the following:


4.1. Route the tapes and buckles at the front of the seat insert under the seat, above all
mechanisms and wiring assemblies.
4.2. Fasten the buckles and tension by pulling the loose end of the fastening strap. Tuck
excess tape out of sight.
4.3. Some periodic adjustment and re-tensioning may be required.
4.4. Re-adjust the head restraint to desired position.
4.5. Place the fitting instructions in the glovebox of the vehicle.
NOTE: For washing instructions refer to label on seat insert.

Front Seat Cover Package Installation

PARTS LIST

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

92190072 SEAT INSERT (ONYX) 2

FD796 WARRANTY CARD 1

FD1445 FITTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2216380&cellId=18859... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 2218564 Page 1 of 2

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Interior Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 2218564

Load Floor Liner Package Installation


FITTING INSTRUCTIONS:

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218564&cellId=18859... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 2218564 Page 2 of 2

1. If the load floor tie down points are required, use a sharp blade to cut around the witness
marks in the face of the liner (4 places). Refer to View A.

2. If the vehicle is fitted with a cargo barrier it is necessary to remove the lip from the front edge
of the liner and the back of the front corners. Refer to View A.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218564&cellId=18859... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 2221101 Page 1 of 11

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Interior Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 2221101

Rear Compartment Front Partition Package Installation

TOOLS REQUIRED:

Drill, Marker, 5mm Drill Bit, T45 Male Torx Socket, Mandrel (6.75mm), Scriber, Masking Tape,
12mm & 20mm Vinyl Cutter (can be made from hole saw bit as required) and Trim release tool.

NOTE:

• All packaging is to be removed from all parts of the accessory prior to installing the parts
to the vehicle.
• When fitting or reinstalling clip-on parts, ensure all retaining clips are still positioned on the
clip extensions. Dislodged clips must be retrieved to prevent vehicle rattles.
• When removing trim from the vehicle, use only sufficient force to release the trim retaining
clips. Take care not to damage the vehicle trim surfaces when removing components.
• It is recommended that the installation of the barrier be carried out by a suitably qualified
person.

IMPORTANT:

• Check printed scale on all templates before proceeding.


• A vinyl cutting tool should be used for all soft material (roof lining, floor covering
etc.) A vinyl cutter can be made by grinding the teeth from a hole-saw at an angle of
about 45 degrees.
• It is very important that the Emergency Exit (egress) Hammer is always fitted
correctly. Danger of child entrapment when cargo barrier is fitted. Heatstroke or
death may occur if trapped in vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in this
vehicle.

FITTING INSTRUCTIONS:

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2221101&cellId=18860... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 2221101 Page 2 of 11

1. Select the appropriate template to be printed.


Note: This then brings up the cutting template on its own.
2. Click on the magnifying glass in the procedure under the selected cutting template for a
detailed picture of the image.
Note: No other printing method is acceptable as they change the scale.
3. Click on the printer icon above the image next to the 1:1 in order to print in the correct
scale.
4. Use a copy machine to resize the template to ensure the vertical and horizontal axis on the
scale measure 50 mm.
5. Cut out template.
6. Cut out the templates (1) and carefully position on the vehicle and hold in place using
masking tape as indicated.
7. Refer to figure 1 for the following:
7.1. If fitted, remove the luggage compartment blind.
7.2. Place masking tape on the floor at approximate locations where the holes will be
made.
7.3. Position the template (1) around the forward LHS tie down point behind the rear
passenger seat as indicated on the floor template.
7.4. Mark the centre of the hole location shown on the floor template and repeat on the
other side.
Caution: Always check scale, size and position of all templates before drilling. Failing
to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, misalignment of components or
the inability to install the accessory.
7.5. Use a T45 male socket to remove the load floor bolts and panel (2) and drill a 5mm
pilot hole at the marked locations.
7.6. Use a vinyl cutting tool with mandrel attached to open the pilot holes to 12mm.
7.7. Vacuum away all dust & swarf. Refit the panel and tighten fixings to 20 Nm.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2221101&cellId=18860... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 2221101 Page 3 of 11

8. Refer to figure 2 for the following: Drilling rear roof anchor roof trim hole:
8.1. Place masking tape on the roof lining at approximate location where holes will be
made.
8.2. Align the edge of the roof rear template (1) with the LHS edge of the roof rear centre
trim panel (2) and the LHS “D” pillar trim panel (3) as indicated on the template.
CAUTION: Use care to place the template in the correct position.
8.3. Mark the centre of the hole location shown on the roof rear LHS template.
8.4. Repeat steps 10 to 12 on the RHS using the flip side of the template.

9. Drilling front roof anchor roof trim hole: Refer to figure 3 for the following:
9.1. Place masking tape on the roof lining at the location where holes will be made.
9.2. Open the rear LHS grab handle and follow the instructions on the roof front template
(1).
CAUTION: Use care to place the template in the correct position.
9.3. Mark the centre of the hole location as shown on the template and repeat on the RHS
using the flip side of the template.
9.4. For all marked hole locations, use a pointed scribe to pierce through the roof lining
and feel for the M8 roof panel mounted captured nut. Take care when breaking
through the roof lining to prevent damaging the roof fixing points directly behind.
9.5. Use a 20mm vinyl cutting tool to drill out the roof lining.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2221101&cellId=18860... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 2221101 Page 4 of 11

10. Refer to figure 4 for the following:


10.1. Remove the rear grab handles and surrounding trim to allow the roof trim to be
pulled down slightly providing roof clearance. Insert the trim garnish base (1) in the
hole drilled in the roof trim.
IMPORTANT: Pull the roof lining down slightly from the body panelling to enable the
tabs to swing up.
10.2. Swing the locking tabs so they lock with the underside of the roof trim. Roof trim to
roof panel clearance is required to allow the tabs to swing up.
10.3. Insert the correct size garnish spacer (2) (Front garnish spacers 8mm, Rear garnish
spacers 11mm) into the trim garnish base until it locks in place.
10.4. Check roof anchor alignment and thread integrity using an M8 x 39mm thumb bolt
supplied.
10.5. Fitting the Cargo Barrier (Rear Position):
NOTE: When fitting the cargo barrier in the rear position (behind the rear seats) the
long straps are not required. Position the clear plastic anti rattle collars (1) to
prevent the straps contacting each other when stowed. Fit the velcro strap (2)
around the first strap and through the slot in the strap (repeat on the other
strap). Continue to wrap the velcro straps around the second strap to hold the
straps securely against each other and prevent the straps rattling.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2221101&cellId=18860... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 2221101 Page 5 of 11

11. Refer to figure 10 for the following:


11.1. Remove the cargo blind if fitted.
11.2. Prior to placing the cargo barrier into the vehicle ensure that the attachment
brackets (4 places) are rotated to point rearward, towards the rating label side of the
barrier.
11.3. With the cargo barrier's rating label facing the rear, tilt the cargo barrier back and lift
into the wagon load area. Place the cargo barrier directly behind the rear seats sitting
upright.
11.4. Align the top attachment brackets (2 places) with the rear roof mounts. Use the M8
x 39mm thumb bolt to secure the top attachment brackets to the rear roof mounts.
11.5. Align the short bottom attachment brackets (2 places) with the floor mounts. Use
the M8 x 39mm thumb bolt to secure the bottom attachment brackets to the floor
mounts.
11.6. Tighten all fixings.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2221101&cellId=18860... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 2221101 Page 6 of 11

12. Refit the cargo blind as required.


IMPORTANT: Ensure that the emergency exit hammer (1) is clipped to the rearward
facing side of the cargo barrier in the location illustrated. Refer to figure 11.
13. Fitting the Cargo Barrier (Front Position)
NOTE: When fitting the cargo barrier in the front position (behind the front seats, with the
rear seat backs in a folded position), the long bottom straps will be used.

14. Refer to figure 12 for the following:


14.1. Remove the cargo blind if fitted.
14.2. Fold the rear seat backs.
14.3. Prior to placing the cargo barrier into the vehicle ensure that the attachment
brackets (4 places) are rotated to point rearward, towards the rating label side of the
barrier.
14.4. With the cargo barrier's rating label facing the rear, tilt the cargo barrier back and lift
into the wagon load area. Place the cargo barrier directly behind the front seats
sitting upright.
14.5. Align the top attachment brackets (2 places) with the front roof mounts. Use the M8
x 39mm thumb bolt to secure the top attachment brackets to the front roof mounts.
14.6. Align the long bottom attachment brackets (2 places) with the floor mounts. Use the
M8 x 39mm thumb bolt to secure the bottom attachment brackets to the floor
mounts.
14.7. Tighten all fixings.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2221101&cellId=18860... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 2221101 Page 7 of 11

15. Refit the cargo blind as required.


IMPORTANT: Ensure that the emergency exit hammer (1) is clipped to the rearward
facing side of the cargo barrier in the location illustrated. Refer to figure 13.
CAUTION: Check that all fasteners are tight and recheck periodically.

Warning:

• Never leave a child in the vehicle unattended, particularly in the rear cargo area. The
cargo area should never be used as a play area for children.
• The maximum load to be carried behind the Cargo Barrier is 60 kg single mass. If an
object weighs 60 kg, only one object is permitted behind the Cargo Barrier.
• Strict compliance with Fitting Instructions is essential for this safety product to meet
its rated capacity.
• Seat, seat belt or child restraint anchorages must not be used for mounting the
Cargo Barrier.
• Do not remove the plaque from the cargo barrier.
• Where high tensile threaded fasteners are used, the cargo barrier must be installed
using the size and grade fasteners specified by Holden.
• Do not attach (drill, rivet, tie etc.) objects to the front or rear of the Cargo Barrier.
• When possible place load against the Cargo Barrier.
• Secure the load with a restraint system.
• Be mindful that in an accident, cargo may cause the Cargo Barrier to deform towards
passengers.
• If involved in an accident or accidentally damaged, the Cargo Barrier should be
replaced and the anchorages repaired to as new condition.
• Clean the Cargo Barrier with mild soap and water only. Do not use solvents or
chemicals. Discard Cargo Barrier if it becomes rusted.
• Do not store outside.
• Check that all fasteners and straps are tight and re- check periodically.
• Do not place smaller items, that may bypass the cargo barrier in the event of heavy
braking or collision, near the edges of the barrier.
• Do not obstruct seat belts or child restraints, or their operation.
• Do not attach the cargo barrier to the vehicle using seat, seat belt or child restraint
anchorages.
• Do not modify cargo barrier in any way.
• Do not use this cargo barrier in any other vehicle for which it is not designed.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2221101&cellId=18860... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 2221101 Page 8 of 11

• During a collision, moving cargo may damage the seat belts and the tether strap of a
child restraint device or its anchorage. Load should not be in contact with webbing.
• When cargo is placed behind the cargo barrier, it may damage child restraint
anchorages and upper anchorage straps (where applicable).
• Long, thin items of cargo should be positioned in the vehicle with the long axis across
the vehicle to minimize the penetration risk.
• Ensure the Emergence Exit Hammer is correctly fitted to the cargo barrier at all
times.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2221101&cellId=18860... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 2221101 Page 9 of 11

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2221101&cellId=18860... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 2221101 Page 10 of 11

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2221101&cellId=18860... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 2221101 Page 11 of 11

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2221101&cellId=18860... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 2218357 Page 1 of 2

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Interior Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 2218357

Rear Seat Auxiliary Cover Package Installation

FITTING INSTRUCTIONS

1. Open the fastener (1) that joins the back of the pet protector to the base of the pet
protector and feed the pet protector between the seat back and the two shoulder
harnesses of the RHS seat belts.
2. Pass the seat belt buckles through the gaiters (2).
3. Open the fastener (3) on the top of the seat protector, feed the protector under the edge of
the seat belt escutcheon and close the fastener.
4. Fit the back of the seat protector over the top of the seat and tuck the side flaps (4)
between the seat side bolsters and the side of the vehicle body.
5. Tuck the flaps (5) on the end of the seat protector sides between the seat base and the
side of the vehicle body.
6. Clip the elastic straps (6) on the back of the seat protector to the lower edge of the seat
back latch escutcheon. Refer to view A.

Rear Seat Auxiliary Cover Package Installation

PARTS LIST

PART No DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218357&cellId=18860... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 2218357 Page 2 of 2

PARTS LIST

92213799 VINYL SEAT PROTECTOR 1

NS PROOF OF WARRANTY CARD 1

NS FITTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

NS - Not serviced SP - Serviced Part

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218357&cellId=18860... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 3751667 Page 1 of 1

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Interior Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 3751667

Side Door Sill Trim Plate Package Installation


FITTING INSTRUCTIONS:

Note: Ensure the parts and the vehicle body are at 22°C or higher during installation and
remain at 22°C for a minimum of 30 mins after installing the accessory sill inserts.
If the vehicle is not fitted with an existing sill plate insert please proceed directly to
Step 3.

1. Warm the existing sill plate to assist in getting the edge of a release tool under the sill
plate, carefully pry up to remove the existing sill plate (1).
Caution: Take care not to damage the edge of the recess.
2. Use a flat bladed scraper to remove all the adhesive material from the sill plate recess.
3. Prior to installing the accessory sill plate insert ensure that the sill plate recess is entirely
clean and free of any dust, wax, soap or oily films by using a suitable cleaning solution
(Isopropal alcohol).
4. Remove the backing paper (2) from the adhesive strip on the accessory sill plate insert.
Align the accessory sill plate insert with the recess. Starting from one end, apply firm
pressure on the accessory sill plate insert and rub down from one end to the other
ensuring complete tape adhesion.
5. Remove the plastic protective film from the front face of the sill plate insert and dispose of
in an appropriate manner.

Side Door Sill Trim Plate Package Installation

PARTS LIST

PART No DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

92278360 Sill Plate Insert Kit 1

Sill Plate Insert - Front 2

Sill Plate Insert - Rear 2

92278363 FITTING INSTRUCTIONS 1


© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3751667&cellId=25694... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 3511777 Page 1 of 6

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Interior Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 3511777

Steering Wheel Package Installation


Installation Instructions Part Number

92272322

Kit Contents

Qty Description

1 Rim Asm-strg

1 Harness

1 Switch - Left

1 Switch - Right

2 Bolt Cap Head

1 Installation Instructions

Tools Required

• Trim release tool


• T25, T27, T50 Torx bits
• Ratchet and Pliers

Warnings and General Information

• Please refer to SI for the correct procedure for disabling the air bag prior to the fitting of this
accessory and then the enabling of the air bag once this accessory has been fitted.
• This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System. Failure to
follow the correct procedure could cause the following conditions:
◦ Air bag deployment
◦ Personal injury
◦ Unnecessary SIR system repairs
• The Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) maintains a reserved energy
supply. Deployment power is available for as much as 2 minutes after disconnecting the
vehicle power. Wait 2 minutes before commencing work on the system.
• Discard an Airbag if it has been dropped from a height of 92 cm (3 feet) or greater:
• Dual Stage Air Bags:
Dual stage air bags have two deployment stages. If stage 1 was used to deploy a dual stage
air bag, stage 2 may still be active. Therefore, a deployed dual stage air bag must be treated
as an active air bag. If disposal of a dual stage air bag is required, both deployment loops
must be energized to deploy the air bag.
• When carrying an undeployed inflator module:
◦ Do not carry the inflator module by the wires or connector.
◦ Make sure the air bag opening points away from you.
• When storing an undeployed inflator module:

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3511777&cellId=22514... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 3511777 Page 2 of 6

◦ Make sure the air bag opening points away from the surface on which the inflator
module rests.
◦ Provide free space for the air bag to expand in case of an accidental deployment.

Failure to observe these guidelines may result in personal injury.

Procedure

Warning: When carrying a live inflator module, make sure the bag opening is pointed
away from you. This minimizes the chance of injury in the case of an accidental
deployment. Never carry the inflator module by the wires. Never carry the
inflator module by the connector on the underside of the module.
Make sure that the bag and trim cover are facing up whenever you place a live
inflator module on any surface. This is necessary to provide a free space for the
bag to expand in the unlikely event of accidental deployment.
Never rest the steering column assembly on the steering wheel with the inflator
module face down, and the column vertical. This may result in personal injury.
1. Raise the steering wheel to it’s maximum height and fully extend the steering column.
2. Disconnect the vehicle battery ground.
3. Allow 2 minutes to pass then rotate steering wheel 90° clockwise to expose access hole
located on the rear of the steering wheel.
4. Fully insert a small screwdriver or equivalent tool at a slight angle into access hole.
5. Apply and keep constant pressure on handle towards instrument panel moving the tool in
an outward direction to release the steering wheel airbag from the steering wheel.
6. Rotate the steering wheel 180 counter clockwise to expose remaining access hole. Repeat
above for this side.
7. Release the connector position assurance (CPA) retainer.
8. Disconnect the airbag electrical connectors and remove airbag (1).

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3511777&cellId=22514... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 3511777 Page 3 of 6

9. Center the steering wheel.


10. Disconnect the steering wheel harness connector (2) from the steering column electrical
connector (1).
11. Disconnect the steering wheel harness from the two steering wheel control switches (5).
12. Loosen the steering wheel bolt until two to three threads are left engaged.
13. Wiggle the steering wheel until the steering wheel disengages completely.
14. Remove the steering wheel bolt (4) and steering wheel (3).
Note: Once the steering wheel has been removed, use tape to ensure the column
electrical assembly remains in the top position.

15. Use a trim release tool to gently release the ten retaining tabs on the switch trim assembly
(1). Start at the top of the switch trim assembly and release the left and right switches
and work around to the bottom.
Note: Gently release tabs one by one, using care to avoid snapping the tab off.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3511777&cellId=22514... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 3511777 Page 4 of 6

16. Remove the three shoulder bolts (1) retaining the horn mechanism (2) to the steering
wheel and remove the horn mechanism. Discard the steering wheel rim.

17. Unclip the steering wheel electrical harness (4) from the horn mechanism (5) and
disconnect the two spade connectors (6) from the horn mechanism. Discard the steering
wheel electrical harness.
18. Install the replacement steering wheel electrical harness to the horn mechanism, ensure
the BLACK electrical connector (1) is to the right side of the steering wheel.
19. Ensure the harness is engaged in the two BLACK harness retention clips (2) and the cable
clips (3) are clipped into the retaining holes.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3511777&cellId=22514... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 3511777 Page 5 of 6

Caution: Use the correct fastener in the correct location. Replacement fasteners must be
the correct part number for that application. Fasteners requiring replacement or
fasteners requiring the use of thread locking compound or sealant are identified
in the service procedure. Do not use paints, lubricants, or corrosion inhibitors on
fasteners or fastener joint surfaces unless specified. These coatings affect
fastener torque and joint clamping force and may damage the fastener. Use the
correct tightening sequence and specifications when installing fasteners in order
to avoid damage to parts and systems.
20. Use the three shoulder bolts to install the horn mechanism to the replacement steering
wheel rim.
Tighten
Tighten the bolts to 5.5 ±5N.m of torque.
21. Feed the two paddle shift connectors (4) on the replacement steering wheel harness
through the two holes each side of the steering wheel (2) and connect the two paddle
change switches (1) to the connectors.
22. Fit the paddle switches to the steering wheel and secure in position with the two cap head
bolts (3) supplied.
Tighten
Tighten the bolts to 1.3 ±3N.m of torque.

23. Ensure the wires of the steering wheel harness are seated in the channels (1) in the
steering wheel.
24. Remove the tape holding the column electrical assembly and reinstall the steering wheel to
the vehicle.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3511777&cellId=22514... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 3511777 Page 6 of 6

Tighten
Tighten the steering wheel bolt to 30 ±5N.m of torque.
25. Reconnect the steering wheel harness to the column electrical assembly.
26. Install the steering wheel switch assembly. Once seated correctly in the steering wheel.
Reconnect the steering wheel electrical harness connectors to the steering wheel switches.
27. Re-install the steering wheel air bag assembly.
28. From TIS2WEB Service Programming System, program the BCM selecting (WZJ -
ACCESSROY-KIT-TRANSMISSION, REDUNDANT CONTROLS - STEERING WHEEL), then
perform the BCM Configuration & Setup.
29. Clear all Diagnostic Trouble Codes.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3511777&cellId=22514... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 3444867 Page 1 of 3

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Trim Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 3444867

Master Accessory Instruction List


Master Accessory Instruction List

Instruction Package
Title Instruction
Number Number

Bicycle Carrier Package


Bicycle Carrier 92239522 92239523
Installation

Liftgate Window Air


Dust Deflector Kit (Wagon) 92224804 92224806 Deflector Package
Installation

Front Bumper Fascia


Front Bumper Fascia Extension 92458365 92420720 Extension Package
Installation

Front Fog Lamp Bezel


Front Fog Lamp Bezel 92272734 92272733
Package Installation

92420149
92295964 92420150
Front Grille Kit Front Grille Kit Installation
92457282 92272910
92272911

Front Side Marker Lamp


Front Side Marker Lamp 92295963 92295017
Package Installaton

Headlamp Protective
Headlamp Protective Cover 92457312 92259626
Cover Kit Installation

92260166 Hood Air Deflector


Hood Air Deflector -
92265354 Package Installation

92457242
(Black) Hood Decal Package
Hood Decal 92420704
92457243 Installation
(Red)

Rear End Spoiler Package


Lip Spoiler 92457814 92457812
Installation

92457266
(Black)
92420705 92457297
(Coupe) (Red) Rear Compartment Lid
Rear Compartment Lid Decal
92420706 92457252 Decal Package Installation
(Ute) (Black)
92457253
(Red)

Rear Mud Flap Guard 92291335 92291333


© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3444867&cellId=19112... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 3444867 Page 2 of 3

Instruction Package
Title Instruction
Number Number

Rear Mud Flap Guard


Package Installation

Load Floor Mat Package


Rubber Load Mat 92250912 92227790
Installation

92179316
92179318
92184482 Front Fender Mud Flap
Mudflaps Front 92420339
92254225 Package Installation
92272935
92295024

92420339 92179322 Rear Mud Flap Package


Mudflaps Rear
92272938 92267788 Installation

Rear Window Outside


Sunguard (Rear) FD1490 92174822 Sunshade Package
Installation

92457238
(Black)
92420703 (4 92457239
- Door) (Red) Side Decal Package
Side Decal
92606178 92457240 Installation
(Ute) (Black)
92457241
(Red)

Side Door Window Upper


Side Door Window Upper Air
92264939 92294146 Air Deflector Package
Deflector
Installation

Towbar Escutcheon 92253251 92186336 Rear Bumper Fascia Tow


92186338 Hook Access Hole Cover
Molding Package
92186340
Installation
92186342
92186344
92213069
92213070
92227780
92227781
92251836
92251837
92253393
92253395
92263406
92265441
92263407
92268837
92268839

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3444867&cellId=19112... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 3444867 Page 3 of 3

Instruction Package
Title Instruction
Number Number

92268841
92268845
92269144

Important: Reference use only. Always refer to the authorized Holden Accessory Parts Catalogue
for the latest part information.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3444867&cellId=19112... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 2221500 Page 1 of 6

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Trim Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 2221500

Bicycle Carrier Package Installation

FITTING INSTRUCTIONS:

1. Refer to Figure 1 for the following:


1.1. Unlock and open the lever (1) as shown.
© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2221500&cellId=18642... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 2221500 Page 2 of 6

1.2. Rotate the frame holder (2) to the side.


1.3. Slide the arm (3) forwards as shown to unlock the inner front lever.

NOTE: It is recommended that the cross bars be cleaned prior to fitting the bike carrier.
IMPORTANT: Refer to the appendix on the back pager of these instruction when installing
the bike carrier to a VE/WM vehicle.
2. Refer to Figure 2 for the following:
2.1. Open the three levers (1) on the bike carrier.
2.2. Remove the brackets and replace with the supplied C-slot bolts (2). Fit the rubber
spacer (5) to the rear C-slot bolt along the cross bar under the bike carrier.
2.3. Flip the cross bar end cap covers (3) down and slide the C-slot bolts hanging from the
bike carrier into the cross bar C-slot.

3. Refer to Figure 3 for the following:


3.1. Adjust the tension on the Sq head bolts by spinning the over centre lever (1).
3.2. Close the lever (2).

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2221500&cellId=18642... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 2221500 Page 3 of 6

4. Refer to Figure 4 for the following:


4.1. To facilitate placing the bike in the profile, fold the straps (1) as shown.
4.2. Place the bike in the profile.

5. Refer to Figure 5 for the following:


5.1. Fold the arm (1) towards the bicycle frame (2).
5.2. Slide and turn the adjusting arm to fit the bicycle frame.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2221500&cellId=18642... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 2221500 Page 4 of 6

6. Refer to Figure 6 for the following:


6.1. When the frame holder is adjusted to the bicycle frame, fold the lever (1) up to the
middle position, spin it around to achieve the correct force when closing it.
IMPORTANT: Delicate frames may be damaged if too much force is used.
6.2. When the bicycle frame is attached firmly, snap the lever (2) closed and use the key
to lock.

7. Refer to Figure 7 for the following:


7.1. Adjust the position of the rear wheel holder (1) by sliding it, then tighten the strap
around the wheel. Tighten the front wheel and make sure that the strap runs around
the wheel and through the hole in the tyre location profile.
7.2. Fold the strap (2) into the strap holder underneath to prevent it from hanging down
and interfering with the roof.

8. Refer to Figure 8 for the following:


8.1. Make sure that the bicycle and bike carrier are firmly attached by pulling and pushing
it.
8.2. When driving without a bicycle in the carrier, lock the frame holder (1) to the parking
post (2). When the frame holder is locked, one of the two front levers are locked
against the load bar.
8.3. Make a note of the key number.
key number
9. Place the keys and fitting instructions in the glovebox of the vehicle.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2221500&cellId=18642... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 2221500 Page 5 of 6

Bicycle Carrier Package Installation

PARTS LIST

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

92239523 BIKE CARRIER 1

NP M6 x 30 SQUARE HEAD BOLT 1

NP M6 x 60 SQUARE HEAD BOLT 2

KEYS 2

92239522 FITTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

FD796 PROOF OF WARRANTY CARD 1

NS - Not serviced SP - Serviced Part

IMPORTANT:

• The maximum permissible roof load must not be exceeded (see vehicle hand book
for details of the maximum roof load).
• The roof load comprises the weight of the basic rack plus the additional accessory
and load itself.
• Check that the rack system is securely fitted before each trip and at regular
intervals.
• Sensitivity to cross winds, behaviour in curves and braking:
• The handling of the vehicle changes when transporting a load on the roof. For safety
reasons, we recommend you exercise extreme care transporting wind resistant loads.
• Bike Carrier = 4.6kg.

ATTENTION: The vehicle height is altered with the fitting of cross bars bike carrier and bicycle. This
must be taken Into consideration when driving through tunnels, under bridges and when
driving into garages.

FITTING INSTRUCTIONS: Appendix

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2221500&cellId=18642... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 2221500 Page 6 of 6

Fit the rubber spacer (1) to the rear bar C-slot bolt running along the cross bar under the bike
carrier. Refer to figure 9.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2221500&cellId=18642... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 3290691 Page 1 of 7

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Trim Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 3290691

Front Bumper Fascia Extension Package Installation


Installation Instructions Part Number

92458365

TOOLS REQUIRED:

6 mm drill bit, drill, non-permanent pen.

FITTING INSTRUCTIONS:

Note: Read instructions carefully before installation.

Note: It is strongly recommended that installation is conducted by an authorized dealer.

Note: This product must be installed exactly as specified in these instructions. Failure to do so
may result in improper fit and/or retention.

Note: The Front Lip Spoiler only requires periodic cleaning with a mild car wash soap and
water solution.

Note: Only use cleaners, waxes or products that are labelled safe for use on plastics.

Note: Do not use abrasive cleaners, solvents or any chemicals unless labelled safe for plastics.

Note: Place these instructions in vehicles glove box after installation is complete.

1. Thoroughly clean and dry the installation areas (1).

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3290691&cellId=25468... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 3290691 Page 2 of 7

2. Trial fit lower spoiler RH (1) to vehicle to check fitment. Clean tape contact areas with
alcohol wipe provided and wipe away residue with a dry clean cloth. Mark the edge of the
part with a non-marking pen (2) on the bumper as shown. This will allow the installer to
line the part at the start of the install.

3. Remove approximately 25mm of tape liner (1) from each piece of tape from the part.
Note: Fold the liner over the edge of the part to ensure it remains in reach during install,
it can often help to tape the liner to the face of the part to make sure it does not
pull back onto the inside during installation.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3290691&cellId=25468... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 3290691 Page 3 of 7

4. Align the edge of the part with the mark (1) on the bumper and rotate the part into
position holding it against the bumper in the center. As the part is rotating into position,
maintain contact between the underside of the part and the underside of the bumper by
applying slight upward pressure and ‘sliding’ it into position. This will ensure the part is
sitting flush against the bumper surfaces.

5. Once the part (2) is in position, there are 3 checks to ensure it is positioned correctly.
Check the gap at the center of the part (2) is consistent and matches the shape of the
bumper (1), check the top ‘horn’ of the part matches the shape of the bumper (1), and
check the side of the part, there should be no gap between the base of the part and the
bumper (1).
Note: Ensure part matches shape of bumper during install.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3290691&cellId=25468... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 3290691 Page 4 of 7

6. After confirming the part is positioned correctly, remove the remaining tape liner in the
following order, after removing each piece of tape liner, apply pressure to the area to
ensure the tape has bonded properly, this should be done before removing the next piece
of tape liner. Repeat step 2-6 for the LHS piece.

7. Trial fit the center piece to the vehicle and ensure the center of the part is positioned on
the center of the bumper. Mark the position on the part and the bumper with a non-
permanent marker to assist alignment during installation. Note where the tape contacts
these areas with the alcohol wipe provided, wipe any residue with a clean cloth.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3290691&cellId=25468... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 3290691 Page 5 of 7

8. Note on the LH (1) & RH (2) pieces where the tape on the back of the center piece will
contact, both on the central part and the underside. Prime these areas (3) with the primer
supplied in the hardware kit.

9. Remove approximately 25mm of tape liner (1) from the center piece (2) as shown.

10. Install the center piece to the vehicle by ‘sliding’ it into position and ensure the underside
of the center piece maintains contact with the underside of the outer pieces. There are 2
checks to ensure the part is positioned correctly. First check the top edges align and then
check the gap between the outer and center pieces on both sides are consistent. This will
ensure the pieces are positioned neatly together. If there are any gaps (1), remove the
center piece and re-position.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3290691&cellId=25468... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 3290691 Page 6 of 7

11. Once the part is in position, remove the tape liner from the top (1) of the part first
applying pressure against the bumper as the liner is removed. Then remove the tape liner
on the underside (2) of the part applying pressure as it is being removed. This will ensure
maximum adhesion.

12. Note the 9 holes (1) on the underside of the parts and drill a 6mm hole in each location.
Ensure you use a drill stop to avoid over travel of the drill. Once complete, install the 9
supplied scrivets (2) into each hole.
Note:
◦ DO NOT DRIVE THE VEHICLE WITHIN 6 HOURS (MINIMUM) TO ALLOW
THE DOUBLE SIDED TAPE TO CURE AND BOND PROPERLY.
◦ DO NOT USE AN AUTOMATIC CAR WASH WITHIN 24 HOURS AFTER
INSTALLATION TO ALLOW DOUBLE SIDED TAPE TO BOND PROPERLY.

Front Bumper Fascia Extension Package Installation

PARTS LIST

DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

Part Number: 92420720

Lower Spoiler Right 1

Lower Spoiler Left 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3290691&cellId=25468... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 3290691 Page 7 of 7

PARTS LIST

Lower Spoiler Center 1

M6 Scrivet 9

Alcohol Wipe 3

Primer 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3290691&cellId=25468... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 2578881 Page 1 of 2

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Trim Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 2578881

Front Fender Mud Flap Package Installation (VE & VF


Only)
TOOLS REQUIRED:

Phillips head screwdriver, 8mm Drill bit and Power drill.

NOTE: Sports mudflap shown, Omega/Evoke & Caprice similar.

FITTING INSTRUCTIONS: FRONT MUDFLAPS

1. Ensure the area around the wheel arch is clean before fitting the mudflaps.
2. Turn the steering wheel to full lock to assist with access. Remove the existing screws (1)
from inside the wheel arch (retain screws).
Note:
For
◦ Kit numbers 92254225, 92179316, 92179318, 92184482, retain the fixing
screws for re-use.
For
◦ Kit numbers 92277966, 92277968, remove and discard plastic washers (10) from
fixing screws (1) and retain fixing screws for reuse.
3. Use an isopropyl alcohol cleaning wipe to thoroughly clean the area where the double sided
tape will adhered to (6). Retain the cleaning wipe for the other side.
4. Fold the backing paper tab (7) on the double sided tape (8) back so that the backing paper
can be removed once the mudflap has been positioned correctly.
5. Align the top mudflap fixing (2) with the lead in gap (3) at the base of the sheet metal of
the wheel arch, angle the mudflap and slide the mudflap (4) up onto the steel lip of the
wheel arch, as you slide the mudflap onto the lip rotate the mudflap until the mudflap is
positioned against the profile of the wheel arch and side sill.
6. Use the screws (1) to fix the mudflap in position.
7. From under the vehicle use the mudflap as a template and drill an 8mm hole (5) in the
base of the side skirt. Fit the scrivet (9) supplied.
8. Remove the backing paper from the double side tape and apply pressure to the tape for 10
seconds to ensure permanent adhesion.
9. Repeat all steps on the other side of the vehicle.
10. Place the fitting instructions in the glovebox of the vehicle.

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2578881&cellId=18792... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 2578881 Page 2 of 2

Front Fender Mud Flap Package Installation

PARTS LIST

PART No DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

92179316
92179318
MUDFLAP KIT (VE ONLY) 1
92184482
92254225

92277966
MUDFLAP KIT (VF ONLY) 1
92277968

MUDFLAP - FRONT (RHS) 1

MUDFLAP - FRONT (LHS) 1

SMALL PARTS KIT 1

92420339 FITTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2578881&cellId=18792... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 3420930 Page 1 of 4

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Trim Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 3420930

Front Fog Lamp Bezel Package Installation


Installation Instructions Part Number

92272734

Note: Read instruction carefully before installation.

Tools Required

• Phillips Head Screwdriver


• Trim Release Tool
• 10mm, 13mm Socket
• Ratchet
• T20 Torx Bit
• Suitable Flat Blade Tool

Fitting Instructions

1. Raise and secure the vehicle off the ground and remove the front wheels.
2. Remove the 6 screws (1) fixing the front wheel arch liner to the vehicle fascia (both sides
of vehicle).

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3420930&cellId=25705... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 3420930 Page 2 of 4

3. Disconnect the fascia harness (1) from the vehicle harness.

4. From under the vehicle, remove the 4 short fascia nappy bolts (1) and the 2 front long
fascia support bolts (2).

5. From under the vehicle bonnet, remove the 6 bolts (2) across the rear edge of the front
fascia cover and the 6 screws (3) across the front of the front cover and remove the cover
(1).

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3420930&cellId=25705... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 3420930 Page 3 of 4

6. Remove the 2 scrivets (3) retaining the fascia to the front cross member. Carefully pull the
fascia outwards to release the fascia from the fender retaining clips (1), then carefully pull
the fascia forwards to release the fascia retaining clips (2) under the headlamps. Remove
the vehicle fascia.

Caution: Place vehicle fascia on a stable work surface and take suitable precaution to
protect the painted surface from any damage.
7. Remove the front fog light covers (1) from the front of the fascia by carefully releasing
clips (2) (11 places) located at the rear of the fascia.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3420930&cellId=25705... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 3420930 Page 4 of 4

8. Remove the fog light cover bezel trims (1) by carefully releasing the retaining clips (2) (10
places).
9. Install accessory fog light cover bezel trims to the fog light covers in a reverse manner to
Step 8 ensuring all clips are correctly secured.
10. Re-install fog light covers to the vehicle fascia ensuring all clips are properly secured.
11. Re-install vehicle fascia and front wheel arch liners to the vehicle in the reverse order as
removed in Steps 1 through 6.

Front Fog Lamp Bezel Package Installation

PARTS LIST

DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

Part Number: 92272733

Fog Lamp Bezel (RHS) 1

Fog Lamp Bezel (LHS) 1

Instructions 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3420930&cellId=25705... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 3322886 Page 1 of 5

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Trim Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 3322886

Front Grille Kit Installation (P/N 92420149, 92420150)


Table 1: Front Grille Kit Installation
Table 2: Front Grille Kit Installation

TOOLS REQUIRED:

Phillips Head Screwdriver, Drill, 8mm, 12mm Drill Bit

Caution: Fitting insect screens in front of upper and lower air intakes at the front of the vehicle may
affect engine cooling and air-conditioning performance. In high load and/or ambient
temperature conditions (eg. towing) no objects should be fitted over or in front of the
upper and lower air intakes.

Important: To ensure optimum engine cooling is maintained, it is necessary that the insect screen
is visually inspected frequently and cleaned when required.

FITTING INSTRUCTION

1. Align the upper insect screen centrally within the upper grille opening. Insect screen cable
ties (1) should point towards the vehicle fascia.
2. With the upper grille insect screen in the correct position, mark on the vehicle grille the
two upper outer hole positions of the insect screen.
3. Temporarily remove the upper grille insect screen and drill an 8mm pilot hole through the
fascia grille at the two positions marked in Step 2. Open up the pilot holes using the 12mm
drill bit, take care to ensure the drill bit does not damage the grille ribs.
4. Place the washer on the 2 x 1/8 bolt and pass the bolt through the two upper outer
position holes on the upper grille insect screen. Spin the spring toggle onto the bolt until
the thread of the bolt protrudes approximately 1mm from the spring toggle. Insect screen
cable ties (1) should point towards the vehicle fascia.

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3322886&cellId=25485... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 3322886 Page 2 of 5

5. Place the washer on the 2 1/2 x 3/16 bolt and pass the bolt through the remaining six
holes in the upper grille insect screen, spin the spring toggle onto the bolt until the thread
of the bolt protrudes.
6. Align the screen centrally within the upper grille opening.
7. Hold the head of the bolt against the screen and push on the bolt to close the spring toggle
as it passes through the vehicle grille. Once through, the spring toggle will spring open
with an audible ‘click’. Refer to Section A-A.
8. When all eight bolts are through and sitting flat against the rear side of the grille, tighten
the bolts ensuring the insect screen is still square with the fascia. Take care not to over
tighten the bolts which may result in the distorting of the insect screen. Refer to Section A
-A.
9. Remove the licence plate if fitted.
10. Align the lower insect screen centrally within the lower fascia checking that the front park
assist sensors are not obscured. Insect screen cable ties (1) should point towards the
vehicle fascia.
Caution: Ensure lower insect screen is positioned correctly and does not obstruct front
park assist sensors.
11. With the lower grille insect screen in the correct position, mark on the vehicle fascia the
two outer hole positions of the insect screen.
12. Temporarily remove the lower grille insect screen and drill an 8mm pilot hole through the
fascia at the two positions marked in Step 11. Open up the pilot holes using the 12mm
drill bit.
13. Place the washer on the 2 1/8 bolt and pass the bolt through the outer position holes in
the lower grille insect screen. Spin the spring toggle onto the bolt until the thread of the
bolt protrudes approximately 1mm from the spring toggle. Insect screen cable ties (1)
should point towards the vehicle fascia.
14. Place the washer on the 2 1/2 x 3/16 bolt and pass the bolt through the center position
hole in the lower grille insect screen, spin the spring toggle onto the bolt until the thread
of the bolt protrudes.
15. Align the insect screen centrally within the lower fascia opening double checking that the
front park assist sensors are not obscured.
16. Hold the head of the bolt against the screen and push on the bolt to close the spring toggle
as it passes through the vehicle grille. Once through the spring toggle will spring open with
an audible ‘click’. Refer to Section B-B.
17. When all three bolts are through and sitting flat against the rear side of the grille, tighten
the bolts ensuring the insect screen is still square with the fascia. Take care not to over
tighten the bolts which may result in distorting of the insect screen. Refer to Section B-B.
18. Refit the licence plat if previously removed in Step 9.
19. Place the fitting instructions in the vehicle glovebox.

Front Grille Kit Installation

PARTS LIST

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

92420149 Front Grille Kit 1

Insect Screen - Upper 1

Insect Screen - Lower 1

Spring Toggle 3/16 7

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3322886&cellId=25485... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 3322886 Page 3 of 5

PARTS LIST

Spring Toggle 1/8 4

Bolt 2 1/2 x 3/16 7

Bolt 2 x 1/8 4

Washer 11

92295964 FITTING INSTRUCTION 1

Note: Read instruction carefully before installation.

TOOLS REQUIRED:

Phillips Head Screwdriver, Drill, 8mm, 12mm Drill Bit

Caution: Fitting insect screens in front of upper and lower air intakes at the front of the vehicle may
affect engine cooling and air-conditioning performance. In high load and/or ambient
temperature conditions (eg. towing) no objects should be fitted over or in front of the
upper and lower air intakes.

Important: To ensure optimum engine cooling is maintained, it is necessary that the insect screen
is visually inspected frequently and cleaned when required.

FITTING INSTRUCTION

1. Align the RHS upper grille insect screen centrally within the upper grille opening. Insect
screen cable ties (1) should point towards the vehicle fascia.
2. With the RHS upper grille insect screen in the correct position, mark on the vehicle grille
the two outer hole positions of the insect grille.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3322886&cellId=25485... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 3322886 Page 4 of 5

3. Temporarily remove the RHS upper grille insect screen and drill an 8mm pilot hole through
the fascia at the two positions marked in Step 2. open up the pilot holes using the 12mm
drill bit, take care to ensure the drill bit does not damage the grille ribs.
4. Place the washer on the 2 x 1/8 bolt and pass the bolt through the 2 outer position holes in
the upper grille insect screen, spin the spring toggle onto the bolt until the thread of the
bolt protrudes approximately 1mm from the spring toggle. Insect screen cable ties (1)
should point towards the vehicle fascia.
5. Place the washer on the 2 1/2 x 3/16 bolt and pass the bolt through the 2 inner holes in
the RHS upper grille insect screen, spin the spring toggle onto the bolt until the thread of
the bolt protrudes. Insect screen cable ties (1) should point towards the vehicle fascia.
6. Position the screen within the RHS upper grille opening and align against the center Holden
badge.
7. Hold the head of the bolt against the screen and push on the bolt to close the spring toggle
as it passes through the vehicle grille. once through the spring toggle will spring open with
an audible ‘click’. Refer to Sectons A-A.
8. When all four bolts are through and sitting flat against the rear side of the grille, tighten
the bolts ensuring the insect screen is still square with the fascia. Take care not to over
tighten the bolt which may result in distorting of the insect screen. Refer to Section A-A.
9. Repeat steps 1 to 8 for the LHS upper grille insect screen.
10. Place the washer on the 2 x 3/16 bolt and pass the bolt through the middle grille insect
screen, spin the spring toggle onto the bolt until the thread of the bolt protrudes. Insect
cable ties (1) should point towards the vehicle fascia.
11. Align the middle grille insect screen centrally within the middle fascia opening.
12. Hold the head of the bolt against the screen and push on the bolt to close the spring toggle
as it passes through the vehicle grille. Once through the spring toggle will spring open with
an audible ‘click’. Refer to Section B-B.
13. When all four bolts are through and sitting flat against the rear side of the grille, tighten
the bolts ensuring the insect screen is still square with the fascia. Take care not to over
tighten the bolts which may result in the distorting of the insect screen. Refer to Section B
-B.
14. Refit license plate if fitted.
15. Place the washer on the 2 x 3/16 bolt and pass the bolt through the hole in the lower grille
insect screen, spin the plate nut onto the bolt until the thread of the bolt protrudes. Insect
screen cable ties (1) should point towards the vehicle fascia.
16. Align the screen centrally within the lower fascia opening.
17. Hold the head of the bolt against the screen and push on the bolt with the plate nut in a
horizontal position as it passes through the vehicle grille. Once through, rotate the
bolt/plate nut in to a vertical position. Refer to Section C-C.
18. When all four bolts are through and sitting flat against the rear side of the grille, tighten
the bolts ensuring the insect screen is still square with the fascia. Take care not to over
tighten the bolts which may result in the distorting of the insect screen. Refer to Section C
-C.
19. Refit licence plate if previously removed in step 14.
20. Place the fitting instructions in the vehicle glovebox.

Front Grille Kit Installation

PARTS LIST

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

92420150 Front Grille Kit 1

Insect Screen - Upper (RHS) 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3322886&cellId=25485... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 3322886 Page 5 of 5

PARTS LIST

Insect Screen - Upper (LHS) 1

Insect Screen - Middle 1

Insect Screen - Lower

Spring Toggle 3/16 8

Spring Toggle 1/8 4

Plate Nut 3” 4

Bolt 2 1/2 x 3/16 4

Bolt 2 x 3/16 8

Bolt 2 x 1/8 4

Washer 16

92295964 FITTING INSTRUCTION 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3322886&cellId=25485... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 3329412 Page 1 of 5

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Trim Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 3329412

Front Grille Kit Installation (P/N 92272910, 92272911)


Installation Instructions Part Number

92457282

Note: Read instruction carefully before installation.

Tools Required

• Phillips Head Screwdriver


• Trim Release Tool
• 10mm, 13mm Socket
• Ratchet
• T20 Torx Bit
• Suitable Flat Blade Tool

Fitting Instructions

1. Raise and secure the vehicle off the ground.


2. Remove the 6 screws (1) fixing the front wheel arch liner to the vehicle fascia (both sides
of vehicle).

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3329412&cellId=25485... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 3329412 Page 2 of 5

3. Disconnect the fascia harness (1) from the vehicle harness.

4. From under the vehicle, remove the 4 short fascia nappy bolts (1) and the 2 front long
fascia support bolts (2).

5. From under the vehicle bonnet, remove the 6 bolts (2) across the rear edge of the front
fascia cover and the 6 screws (3) across the front of the front cover and remove the cover
(1).

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3329412&cellId=25485... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 3329412 Page 3 of 5

6. Remove the 2 scrivets (3) retaining the fascia to the front cross member. Carefully pull the
fascia outwards to release the fascia from the fender retaining clips (1), then carefully pull
the fascia forwards to release the fascia retaining clips (2) under the headlamps. Remove
the vehicle fascia.

Caution: Place vehicle fascia on a stable work surface and take suitable precaution to
protect the painted surface from any damage.
7. Remove the lower center grille (1) from the rear of the fascia by carefully releasing the
fascia grille retaining clips (2) (19 places).

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3329412&cellId=25485... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 3329412 Page 4 of 5

8. Remove the lower center grille trim surround (1) by carefully levering the tabs (2) upwards
to release the retaining clips (3) (21 places).
9. Install accessory lower center grille trim surround to the lower center grille in a reverse
manner to Step 8 ensuring all clips are correctly secured.
10. Re-install lower grille assembly to the vehicle fascia ensuring all clips are properly secured.

11. Remove the upper grille (1) from the rear of the fascia by first removing the two retaining
screws (2). Release the fascia grille retaining clips (3) (12 places). Carefully pull the grille
out from the fascia.

12. Remove the upper grille trim surround (1) by carefully releasing the retaining clips (2) (15
places).
13. Install accessory grille trim surround to the upper grille in a reverse manner to Step 12
ensuring all clips are correctly secured.
14. Re-install upper grille assembly to the vehicle fascia ensuring all clips are properly
secured.
15. Re-install vehicle fascia and front wheel arch liners to the vehicle in the reverse order as
removed in Steps 1 through 6.

Front Grille Kit Installation

PARTS LIST

DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3329412&cellId=25485... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 3329412 Page 5 of 5

PARTS LIST

Part Number: 92272910


92272911

Upper Grille Trim 1

Lower Grille Trim 1

Instructions 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3329412&cellId=25485... 11/07/2014
Document ID: 3351957 Page 1 of 2

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Trim Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 3351957

Front Side Marker Lamp Package Installaton


TOOLS REQUIRED:

Ratchet, T20 Torx Bit, Flat-nose Pliers, Suitable Flat Blade Tool.

FITTING INSTRUCTIONS:

1. Remove the two lower rearward screws (1) from the front wheel arch liner (2) and fold
back to gain access to the inside of the wheel arch (both sides).

2. From inside the wheel arch, release the top clip (1) of the Body Side Molding by pressing
downwards.
3. Note the locations of the two center retaining clips (2). Release the clip tabs by carefully
squeezing in with flat-nose pliers or other suitable tool.

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3351957&cellId=25529... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3351957 Page 2 of 2

4. Starting at the top, work the Body Side Molding free from the Body Side Molding recess.
Use a suitable flat bladed tool (if required) at the locations previously noted in Step 3 to
further release the two center clips (1)
5. Release the lower retaining clip (2) by pulling the Body Side Molding upward and outwards.
6. Disconnect the Body Side Molding / turn signal connector (3) from the vehicle harness (4)
and remove the fender vent from the vehicle.
7. Connect the accessory Body Side Molding / turn signal connector to the vehicle harness
connector.
8. From the outside of the vehicle, position the accessory Body Side Molding within the Body
Side Molding recess then carefully press fit starting from the bottom working to the top.
Ensure all clips are fully engaged.
9. Fold back the wheel arch liner to its original position and reinstall the two screws removed
in Step 1.
10. Repeat Steps 1 through 9 for the opposite side of the vehicle.

Front Side Marker Lamp Package Installaton

PARTS LIST

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

92295017 Body Side Molding Kit

Body Side Molding RHS 1

Body Side Molding LHS 1

92295963 FITTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3351957&cellId=25529... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3318510 Page 1 of 3

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Trim Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 3318510

Headlamp Protective Cover Kit Installation


Installation Instructions Part Number

92457312

Tools Required

• Phillips Head Screwdriver


• Cleaning Equipment

Fitting Instructions

1. Open the vehicle bonnet


2. Clean the headlamp lens and surrounds (1). Allow headlamp to dry.

3. Identify the inner bracket (1) by the hole in the flat surface of the bracket which allows the
square nipple (2) on the headlamp to pass through the bracket and hook the bracket into
the headlamp fixing point. Hood the outer bracket into the outer headlamp bracket fixing
point.
4. Use the cleaning wipes to clean the area of the headlamp lens, directly in front of the
brackets. © 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3318510&cellId=21383... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3318510 Page 2 of 3

5. Wipe the area dry and carefully apply the anti-abrasive patches in front of the brackets,
allow 5mm of material to fold around the top of the headlamp. repeat at all 4 locations.

6. Push fit the plastic clips (1) onto the headlamp covers (2), the clips will click into position
then home.

7. Guide the plastic clips (1) on the bottom edge of the headlamp covers in between the
vehicle fascia and the bottom of the headlamp assembly.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3318510&cellId=21383... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3318510 Page 3 of 3

8. Fit the felt washers (1) to the fixing screws (2) supplied and screw the headlamp covers to
the headlamp fixing brackets, but do not tighten at this time.
9. Push up on the headlamp cover and tighten the top fixing screws (2).

Headlamp Protective Cover Kit Installation

PARTS LIST

DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

Part Number: 92259626

Headlamp Protector - Left 1

Headlamp Protector - Right 1

Clip - Plastic 4

Bracket - Outer 2

Bracket - Inner 2

Washer - Felt 4

Screw 4

Anti-Abrasive Pad 4

Cleaning Pad 1

Instructions 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3318510&cellId=21383... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3319662 Page 1 of 3

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Trim Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 3319662

Hood Air Deflector Package Installation


TOOLS REQUIRED:

Phillips Head Screwdriver.

FITTING INSTRUCTIONS:

Note:

• Before fitting the bonnet protector ensure the top and the under surface of the
bonnet is thoroughly clean and dry. Do not use abrasive, spirit or solvent-based
cleaners.
• Closing bonnet with a great force may cause the bonnet protector to contact other
components causing damage. Close with care.

1. Position the clip (1) over the fixing hole (2) to identify where the anti-abrasive pad (3) will
be fitted.
2. Use the cleaning wipe to clean the area around the edge and the top surface of the bonnet
where the anti-adhesive pad will be fitted. Use a clean dry cloth to dry off the area.

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3319662&cellId=18728... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3319662 Page 2 of 3

3. Remove the protective backing from the anti-abrasive pad and fit the pad (1) around the
edge and the top surface of the bonnet, ensure there are not air bubbles trapped between
the bonnet and the anti-abrasive pad.

4. Reposition the handed retaining clips and push the screw plug (1) into the existing hole in
the inner surface of the bonnet and use the self tapping screw (2) to fix in place. Do not
over tighten and strip the thread in the screw plug. Repeat on the right side of the vehicle.
Ensure the screw plug is fitted horizontal in the slot.

5. Fit the washers (1) to all 6 machine screws.


6. Use the machine screws (2) to loosely hold the bonnet protector (3) in position.
7. Use a non-permanent marker to mark the positions where the remaining 4 clips will be
fitted and remove the bonnet protector. Once all positions have been marked, clean and
dry the areas where the 4 additional clips will be fitted.
8. Apply the anti-abrasive pads to the areas that have been cleaned ensuring the pads are
correctly aligned with the marks on the bonnet.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3319662&cellId=18728... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3319662 Page 3 of 3

9. Fit the 4 additional clips (1) ensuring the threaded holes in the clips align with the marks
on the bonnet. Clean off the marks and refit the bonnet protector.
10. When all the clips are in place, fit the remaining machine screws (2) and washers (3).
Confirm the bonnet protectors alignment and tighten all screws. Where possible, ensure
the screw head and washer cover the 2 elongated holes in the bonnet protector.
Note: Ensure the clips are pushed up against the edge of the bonnet for correct fitment
and bonnet protector clearance to the headlamp protectors (if fitted).
11. Place the instructions in the vehicle glovebox.

Hood Air Deflector Package Installation

PARTS LIST

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

92260166
BONNET PROTECTOR 1
92265354

Fixed Clip - Left 1

Fixed Clip - Right 1

Push on clip 4

Cleaning Wipe 1

Anti abrasive pad 6

Screw Plug 2

Screw - Self tapping 2

Screw - Machine thread 6

Felt Washers 6

Instructions 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3319662&cellId=18728... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3606074 Page 1 of 5

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Trim Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 3606074

Hood Air Deflector Package Installation (Instruction


P/N 92274199)
TOOLS REQUIRED:

Clean Soft Cloth, Phillips Head Screwdriver.

Caution: Do not use abrasive, spirit or solvent-based cleaners.

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

1. Read instructions thoroughly before commencing fitment. Wash and dry the vehicle. Open
the hood and thoroughly clean underneath the forward edge of the hood.

2. Remove the grille by removing the grille retaining nuts. Retain the grille nuts. Trial fit the
Hood Protector centrally onto hood. Note the two slots in the centre of the Hood Protector
that correspond with the grille retaining holes in the hood. Also note the outer wing slots in
the Hood Protector. Remove the Hood Protector.

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3606074&cellId=18728... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3606074 Page 2 of 5

3. Fit the plastic nut insert (1) into all the metal clips. Ensure that the legs of the plastic nut
inserts engage fully into the square slots of the metal clips, as shown.

4. At the previously noted grille retaining holes, clean the hood lip with the alcohol wipe
provided. Retain the alcohol wipe. Wipe off any residue with a dry clean cloth. Apply
abrasive resistant tape strips to these centre positions. Fold tape strips over so
approximately half of each strip is adhered to the outside of hood and half into the grille
recess.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3606074&cellId=18728... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3606074 Page 3 of 5

5. Fit the centre metal clips and align the holes in the clips with the grille retaining holes. Re-
secure the grille with the previously removed grille nuts, ensuring that the retaining studs
on the grille pass through the holes in the metal clips.
Important: Ensure that the clips are positioned over the abrasive resistant tape (1) and
do not come in contact with any of the hood’s paint work. Failure to do this
may result in permanent paint damage.

6. Re-fit the Hood Protector (1) centrally onto hood (2). Secure the centre section of the
Hood Protector (grille areas) to the centre metal clips using the screws and washers
provided.

7. Directly beneath the four wing clip holes in the Hood Protector (1), clean the hood lip with
the alcohol wipe (2) provided. Wipe off any residue with a dry clean cloth. Apply abrasive
resistant tape strips (4) to the four outer positions, directly below the wing clip slots in the
Hood Protector. Fold tape strips over so approximately half of each strip is adhered to the
outside and half to the underside of Hood (3).

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3606074&cellId=18728... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3606074 Page 4 of 5

8. Slide the metal outer wing clip over the abrasive resistant tape ensuring the clip is aligned
with the hole in the Hood Protector (1). Secure the Hood Protector to the metal wing clips
(2) using the supplied screws and washers.
Note: These should only be hand tight. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.
Important: Ensure that the clips are positioned over the abrasive resistant tape and do
not come in contact with any of the hood’s (3) paint work. Failure to do this
may result in permanent paint damage.

9. Carefully close the hood checking for correct fitment of the Hood Protector.
Caution: To avoid damage to the hood, do not slam.
TO REMOVE: Reverse the above procedure.

Hood Air Deflector Package Installation

PARTS LIST

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

92274194 (HOLDEN)
92274195 HOOD PROTECTOR 1
(CHEVROLET)

Center Metal Clips 2

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3606074&cellId=18728... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3606074 Page 5 of 5

PARTS LIST

Wing Clips 4

Abrasive Resistant Tape Strips 6

Nut Insert 6

Screws 6

Washers 6

Alcohol Wipe 1

92274199 Instructions 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3606074&cellId=18728... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3323762 Page 1 of 3

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Trim Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 3323762

Hood Decal Package Installation


Installation Instructions Part Number

92420704

Tools Required

Note: To ensure a bubble free application, put three tiny drops of liquid dish soap into a
trigger type plastic spray bottle. Set nozzle for “fine mist”.
• Water
• Clean Towels
• Liquid Dish Soap
• Trigger-Type Spray Bottle
• Isopropyl Alcohol
• Plastic Squeegee
• Needle or Pin
• Masking Tape

Processing Instructions

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3323762&cellId=25486... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3323762 Page 2 of 3

1. The paint surface where the stripes are to be applied must be thoroughly washed with
warm soap and water solution.
2. If present, heavy contamination like tar should be removed with Prepsol or other quality
solvent.
3. Wipe the paint surface with Isopropyl Alcohol just before starting the application. Follow
with a dry wipe.
4. Vehicle body surface and part must be 21°C or higher.
5. Use the Soap/Water mixture to thoroughly saturate the paint surface where the part is to
be applied.
6. Lay the decal face-down on a flat surface, slowly remove the heavy white liner from the
decal & spray the soap/water mixture onto the exposed adhesive.
7. Position the stripe in the location shown in Alignment Instructions and spray the paper
pre-mask surface with an even mist.
8. Thoroughly squeegee the entire surface with firm, overlapping strokes.
9. Remove the pre-mask by pulling it off at 180° or parallel to the surface.
10. If the stripe tends to lift off the paint as the pre-mask is being removed, the cause is:
◦ Too much soap in the spray bottle. Rinse it out and use less soap.
◦ Not enough pressure on the film surface form the squeegee. Increase pressure and
insure overlapping strokes.
11. For any areas that may be lifting, re-apply soap solution to the stripe, wrap a towel around
the squeegee and re-squeegee.
12. For a bubble removal, use a needle or a pin to carefully pierce the bubble to release the
trapped water.
13. Maintain vehicle body temperature of 21°C or higher for a minimum of 30 mins after decal
installation.
14. Do not use an automated/high pressure car wash until 24 hours have elapsed.

Alignment Instructions
Hood Decal

1. Position the individual sections of the template (2) into the locations as shown. Tape (3)
into place.
2. Align the decal (1) to the panel edges as shown and squeegee into place. Refer to
Processing Instructions.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3323762&cellId=25486... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3323762 Page 3 of 3

Hood Decal Package Installation

PARTS LIST

Item Number DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

Part Number: 92457242


(Black), 92457243 (Red)

1 Decal - Hood 1

2 Template - Hood 1

Instructions 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3323762&cellId=25486... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2216372 Page 1 of 3

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Trim Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 2216372

Liftgate Window Air Deflector Package Installation

FITTING INSTRUCTIONS:

IMPORTANT: Before starting to fit the Dust Deflector ensure the vehicle tailgate and
spoiler are clean and dry.
1. Open the vehicle tailgate and remove the top spoiler retaining nut (1). Fit the deflector
mounting bracket (2) to the stud and refit the nut. Hold the bracket against the spoiler and
fasten the nut to 4 Nm. Repeat on the other side of the vehicle. Refer to Figure 1.

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2216372&cellId=18859... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2216372 Page 2 of 3

2. Refer to figure 2 for the following:


2.1. Use the alcohol wipe supplied to clean the undersurface of the dust deflector (1) at the
area indicated by the yellow dot (2) on the upper surface of the deflector.
2.2. Position the deflector on the vehicle to identify the area where the deflector support
(3) will be adhered to the spoiler and use the alcohol wipe to clean the area.
2.3. Peel off one of the protective backing papers from the adhesive pad on one end of the
deflector support and attach the support to the deflector centred under the yellow
dot. Push firmly for 10 seconds.
2.4. Reposition the deflector to the vehicle and confirm the holes in the deflector align with
the holes in the mounting brackets (4). Remove the second protective backing paper
from the deflector support. Keep part away from the vehicle tailgate until the holes in
the deflector are aligned with the holes in the mounting brackets.
2.5. Use the scrivets (5) to fix the deflector to the brackets and firmly push the support
against the spoiler for 10 seconds to ensure permanent adhesion.
IMPORTANT: It will not be possible to remove the dust deflector once the adhesive
contacts the prepared surface. Take great care that the dust deflector is
correctly aligned before allowing the deflector support to contact the
tailgate.
3. Once the dust deflector has been fitted it is recommended that the vehicle must not be
driven for 3 hours to allow the adhesive to cure.

Liftgate Window Air Deflector Package Installation

PARTS LIST

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2216372&cellId=18859... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2216372 Page 3 of 3

PARTS LIST

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

92224806 DUST DEFLECTOR KIT 1

NS DUST PROTECTOR 1

NS METAL BRACKETS 2

NS SCRIVETS 4

NS ALCOHOL WIPES 1

NS SUPPORT 1

92224804 FITTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

FD796 WARRANTY CARD 1

NS - Not serviced SP - Serviced Part

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2216372&cellId=18859... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2369752 Page 1 of 2

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Trim Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 2369752

Load Floor Mat Package Installation


Table 1: Kit Contents
Table 2: Load Floor Mat Package Installation

Accessories Part Number

92227790

Kit Contents

Qty Description

1 Load Floor Mat

Tools Required

Knife

Installation Instructions

1. Place rubber load mat (1) into the vehicle tub.

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2369752&cellId=20528... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2369752 Page 2 of 2

2. If installing the rubber load mat to a vehicle fitted with a Holden tie down rail restraint
system installed, it will be necessary to make cuts in the rubber load mat to expose the
fixing rail.
3. Identify the areas where access to the load rails will be required.
4. remove the rubber mat and place on a suitable cutting surface. use a new knife blade to
cut along each side of the first full length raised rib of the load mat in the area of where
you require access to the tie down rail and remove that part of the rubber rib.

Note: It is recommended that a minimum of 150mm of the rib is retained as adjacent to


the rear wheel arch (1) and as close to the center (1) of the rib as practical to
maintain the rubber load mat's form and position.

Load Floor Mat Package Installation

Load Floor Mat Kit P/N 92227790

Part Number 92250912

Release Date 16 November 2009

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2369752&cellId=20528... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2680991 Page 1 of 2

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Trim Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 2680991

Rear Bumper Fascia Tow Hook Access Hole Cover


Molding Package Installation
FITTING INSTRUCTIONS:

NOTE: Tow bar not shown for clarity. Calais escutcheon shown other escutcheons similar.
◦ Remove the tow bar tongue, if fitted.
◦ Thoroughly clean and dry the fascia tow bar receiver opening.
1. Trial fit the escutcheon to check the opening has been trimmed correctly and the retaining
clips engage.
Note: The base Ute escutcheon is split to allow the escutcheon to pass over the end of the
tow bar receiver tube.
2. Run a bead of flexible automotive urethane adhesive around the inside face of the
escutcheon.
3. Align the clips on the lower edge of the escutcheon (1) with the lower horizontal edge (2) of
the tow bar receiver opening in the fascia (3) and clip onto the fascia.
4. Push home the remaining escutcheon retaining clips.
5. Clean off any excess adhesive.
6. Place the fitting instruction in the glovebox of the vehicle.

Rear Bumper Fascia Tow Hook Access Hole Cover Molding Package Installation

PARTS LIST

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

92186336 ESCUTCHEON 1
92186338
92186340
92186342
92186344
92213069
92213070
© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2680991&cellId=18859... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2680991 Page 2 of 2

PARTS LIST

92227780
92227781
92251836
92251837
92253393
92253395
92263406
92265441
92263407
92268837
92268839
92268841
92268845
92269144

92253251 FITTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2680991&cellId=18859... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3319470 Page 1 of 3

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Trim Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 3319470

Rear Compartment Lid Decal Package Installation


(Coupe)
Installation Instructions Part Number

92420705

Tools Required

Note: To ensure a bubble free application, put three tiny drops of liquid dish soap into a
trigger type plastic spray bottle. Set nozzle for “fine mist”.
• Water
• Clean Towels
• Liquid Dish Soap
• Trigger-Type Spray Bottle
• Isopropyl Alcohol
• Plastic Squeegee
• Needle or Pin
• Masking Tape

Processing Instructions
© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3319470&cellId=22481... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3319470 Page 2 of 3

1. The paint surface where the stripes are to be applied must be thoroughly washed with
warm soap and water solution.
2. If present, heavy contamination like tar should be removed with Prepsol or other quality
solvent.
3. Wipe the paint surface with Isopropyl Alcohol just before starting the application. Follow
with a dry wipe.
4. Vehicle body surface and part must be 21°C or higher.
5. Use the Soap/Water mixture to thoroughly saturate the paint surface where the part is to
be applied.
6. Lay the decal face-down on a flat surface, slowly remove the heavy white liner from the
decal & spray the soap/water mixture onto the exposed adhesive.
7. Position the stripe in the location shown in Alignment Instructions and spray the paper
pre-mask surface with an even mist.
8. Thoroughly squeegee the entire surface with firm, overlapping strokes.
9. Remove the pre-mask by pulling it off at 180° or parallel to the surface.
10. If the stripe tends to lift off the paint as the pre-mask is being removed, the cause is:
◦ Too much soap in the spray bottle. Rinse it out and use less soap.
◦ Not enough pressure on the film surface from the squeegee. Increase pressure and
insure overlapping strokes.
11. For any areas that may be lifting, re-apply soap solution to the stripe, wrap a towel around
the squeegee and re-squeegee.
12. For a bubble removal, use a needle or a pin to carefully pierce the bubble to release the
trapped water.
13. Maintain vehicle body temperature of 21°C or higher for a minimum of 30 mins after decal
installation.
14. Do not use an automated/high pressure car wash until 24 hours have elapsed.

Alignment Instructions
Rear Compartment Lid Decal

1. Tape (2) the template (3) into the location as shown.


2. Align the decal (1) to the template (3) and panel edge as shown and finish installing the
decal. Refer to Processing Instructions.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3319470&cellId=22481... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3319470 Page 3 of 3

Rear Compartment Lid Decal Package Installation

PARTS LIST

Item Number DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

Part Number: 92457266


(Black), 92457297 (Red)

1 Decal - R/CMPT LID (CPE) 1

2 Template - R/CMPT LID 1

Instructions 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3319470&cellId=22481... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3319503 Page 1 of 3

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Trim Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 3319503

Rear Compartment Lid Decal Package Installation (Ute)


Installation Instructions Part Number

92420706

Tools Required

Note: To ensure a bubble free application, put three tiny drops of liquid dish soap into a
trigger type plastic spray bottle. Set nozzle for “fine mist”.
• Water
• Clean Towels
• Liquid Dish Soap
• Trigger-Type Spray Bottle
• Isopropyl Alcohol
• Plastic Squeegee
• Needle or Pin
• Masking Tape

Processing Instructions

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3319503&cellId=22481... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3319503 Page 2 of 3

1. The paint surface where the stripes are to be applied must be thoroughly washed with
warm soap and water solution.
2. If present, heavy contamination like tar should be removed with Prepsol or other quality
solvent.
3. Wipe the paint surface with Isopropyl Alcohol just before starting the application. Follow
with a dry wipe.
4. Vehicle body surface and part must be 21°C or higher.
5. Use the Soap/Water mixture to thoroughly saturate the paint surface where the part is to
be applied.
6. Lay the decal face-down on a flat surface, slowly remove the heavy white liner from the
decal & spray the soap/water mixture onto the exposed adhesive.
7. Position the stripe in the location shown in Alignment Instructions and spray the paper
pre-mask surface with an even mist.
8. Thoroughly squeegee the entire surface with firm, overlapping strokes.
9. Remove the pre-mask by pulling it off at 180° or parallel to the surface.
10. If the stripe tends to lift off the paint as the pre-mask is being removed, the cause is:
◦ Too much soap in the spray bottle. Rinse it out and use less soap.
◦ Not enough pressure on the film surface from the squeegee. Increase pressure and
insure overlapping strokes.
11. For any areas that may be lifting, re-apply soap solution to the stripe, wrap a towel around
the squeegee and re-squeegee.
12. For a bubble removal, use a needle or a pin to carefully pierce the bubble to release the
trapped water.
13. Maintain vehicle body temperature of 21°C or higher for a minimum of 30 mins after decal
installation.
14. Do not use an automated/high pressure car wash until 24 hours have elapsed.

Alignment Instructions
Rear Compartment Lid Decal

1. Mark the center line with tape (1) as shown at the front edge, inside recessed area and
rear edge above the lock barrel.
2. Align the decal (2) to the panel edges as shown and squeegee into place. Refer to
Processing Instructions.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3319503&cellId=22481... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3319503 Page 3 of 3

Rear Compartment Lid Decal Package Installation

PARTS LIST

Item Number DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

Part Number: 92457252


(Black), 92457253 (Red)

1 Decal - R/CMPT LID (UTE) 1

Instructions 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3319503&cellId=22481... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3290693 Page 1 of 7

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Trim Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 3290693

Rear End Spoiler Package Installation (Instruction P/N


92457814)
TOOLS REQUIRED:

Knife, Pliers, 2mm, 6mm Drill Bits, Power Drill, Small File, Center Punch, Masking Tape, Tape
Measure, De-Burring Tool and High Zinc Content Anti-Corrosion Paint.

Note: If the spoiler is being fitted to a decklid with pre-existing holes (i.e. 7 slots in the top surface
of the decklid), the spoiler must be fitted in accordance with the installation instruction for OE
equipment in the electronic Service Information.

Important: Installation of the spoiler when fitted as an accessory:

• Observe all warnings and precautions stated in this instruction booklet:


• Thoroughly wash and dry the vehicle before starting the installation.
• Clean vehicle surface where the lip spoiler will be applied with 70% isopropyl alcohol
or Prepsol or equivalent and wipe with a dry lint free cloth.
• Remove any wax, grease or tar, which might be present.
• Dry off any surface film with a clean, lint-free cloth before the cleaning solvent
evaporates.
• On repainted vehicles, paint must be thoroughly dry and cured before applying the
spoiler to the vehicle. Check paint manufacturer's instructions for recommended cure
time and method.
• Ambient temperature of the lip spoiler and vehicle must be between 16°C to 32°C at
the time of installation and for two hours after.
• The vehicle must be out of direct sunlight to ensure even vehicle body temperature.

Painting Instructions (If Unpainted)

• Sand the deck lid spoiler prior to painting, recommend 400-600 grit sanding paper to activate
the adhesive.
• Prior to painting, clean all surfaces to be painted using clean water and a mild detergent, do
not use lacquer, thinner or any solvent based products. Wipe completely dry.
• Best results will be achieved by wiping the areas to be painted with a tack rag just prior to
painting.

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3290693&cellId=18642... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3290693 Page 2 of 7

• Ensure the retaining clips (1) are protected by the rubber marker caps (2) to prevent over
spray contacting the retaining clips.
• Ensure the areas of the under side of the spoiler where the adhesive tape will be applied are
completely covered with paint to ensure maximum adhesion of the adhesive tape.
• Select a top coat and clear paint that is suitable for ABS (Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene).
• Automotive paint systems, such as acrylics or two packs, can be applied directly to the
components. However, some paints may require a primer. If recommendations on paint
specification are not followed, cracking of the part or degradation to the material may result.
In all paint systems, aromatic hydrocarbons and alkalies are best avoided to reduce damage to
the material properties.
• If using a paint system which requires baking, do not expose the product to temperatures
above 70°C (155°F).
• Allow a minimum of 8 hours after baking before installation on the vehicle.

Spoiler Installation

1. Apply masking tape (1) down the center of the deck lid.
2. Use a tape measure to find and mark the center of the decklid. Draw a line (2) down the
center of the decklid.

Caution: Always check scale, size and position of all templates before drilling. Failing to do
so may cause damage to the vehicle, misalignment of components or the
inability to install the accessory.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3290693&cellId=18642... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3290693 Page 3 of 7

3. From the leading edge of the decklid (2) measure 428.4 mm along the center line (1)
drawn on the tape on the decklid and mark the position on the center line.
4. Use an automatic center punch to mark the center fixing hole (3) on the decklid. Once the
hole center is marked, remove the masking tape.
5. Use a 2 mm pilot drill to drill a pilot hole.
6. Drill out the hole (3) to 6.5 mm.

7. Fit the rubber marker caps (2) to the two end clips (5) on the lip spoiler (1) and apply
masking tape to the decklid area where the ends of the lip spoiler will touch.
8. Use a paint pen (or similar) to apply a thin smear of paint over the edge (4) and the two
dots (3) of the rubber marker caps.
9. Pass the lip spoiler center stud into the center hole in the decklid ensuring the ends of the
lip spoiler do not contact the decklid.
10. Align the spoiler to the decklid by ensuring both ends of the spoiler are spaced equally
from the edges of the decklid.
11. When the spoiler is aligned, push the ends of the lip spoiler down onto the tape on the
decklid at that position. Lift the lip spoiler off the decklid cleanly to prevent the paint
marks smudging.
Note: If the dots in the center of the rubber cap or the outside shape of the rubber cap is
not clear or the holes are not spaced equally from the edges of the decklid, replace
the tape and repeat the process.

12. Use an automatic center punch to mark the center of the dots made by rubber caps on the
decklid. Once the hole centers are marked, remove the masking tape.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3290693&cellId=18642... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3290693 Page 4 of 7

13. Use a 2 mm pilot drill to drill a pilot hole.


14. Drill out the holes to 6 mm.
15. Use a suitable tool to remove the material (1) between the two holes and make one
elongated hole 13x6.5 mm.
Note: Ensure the decklid surface remains flat when making the holes in the decklid. If the
decklid surface is deformed the retention clips will not engage.
16. De-burr all holes and use anti-corrosion stand-alone primer (no topcoat required) suitable
for Aluminum substrates, for e.g. primer Galmet Keytite Alum Primer or equivalent.

17. Once the paint on the lip spoiler has hardened, remove the backing from the adhesive
foam (2) and fit over the clips (1) and center threaded stud (3) on the underside of the lip
spoiler.

18. Follow the surface preparation instructions at the beginning of these instructions and apply
the two adhesive foam tape patches (2) and the two adhesive foam rings (3) to the base
of the spoiler. Then apply two adhesive tape strips (1) to the base of the lip spoiler. Apply
pressure along the length of the foam tape and the adhesive foam rings to ensure
permanent adhesion.
19. Ensure the lip spoiler vent holes (4) are not obstructed.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3290693&cellId=18642... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3290693 Page 5 of 7

20. Trial fit the lip spoiler to the decklid and confirm that the lip spoiler fixings align with the
holes correctly.
21. Pull the tabs (2) on the adhesive backing tape across to the rear edge of the spoiler.
22. Remove the two end backing tapes (1).

23. Once pull tabs have been started, position the spoiler (1) on the deck lid, ensure there is
an equal distance from each side of the deck lid.
24. Clip the spoiler into the elongated holes and carefully pull on the tabs of the backing tape
at 45° and remove.
25. Once all the backing tape has been removed, apply pressure along the length of the
spoiler for several seconds to ensure permanent adhesion.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3290693&cellId=18642... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3290693 Page 6 of 7

26. Remove the decklid carpet trim (1) by removing the ten fir tree clips (2), removing the
assist handle (3) and the spare wheel cover hook (4).

27. From inside the decklid, fit the nut to the decklid lip spoiler center stud (1). Tighten to 6
N.m of torque.

28. Remove the gas struts on the car one side at a time. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release
the gas strut retaining springs (1) and remove the gas strut (2). Fit the appropriate rated

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3290693&cellId=18642... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3290693 Page 7 of 7

gas strut for the spoiler. Clip the replacement gas strut to the decklid hinge, ensure the
gas strut has the telescopic end facing down.
29. Remove and replace the decklid hinge spring (3) with the appropriate rated springs.
30. Ensure any swarf is removed from the vehicle.
31. Refit all parts removed.

Rear End Spoiler Package Installation

PARTS LIST

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

92457812 DECK LID LIP SPOILER KIT

SPOILER 1

TAPE - LEFT 1

TAPE - RIGHT 1

TAPE - CENTER 1

NUT 1

92457814 INSTRUCTIONS 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3290693&cellId=18642... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3905346 Page 1 of 8

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Trim Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 3905346

Rear End Spoiler Package Installation (Instruction P/N


92278255)
TOOLS REQUIRED:

Knife, Pliers, 2mm, 6mm Drill Bits, Power Drill, Small File, Center Punch, Masking Tape, Tape
Measure, De-Burring Tool and anti-corrosion primer suitable for Aluminum.

Note: If the spoiler is being fitted to a decklid with pre-existing holes (i.e. 7 slots in the top surface
of the decklid), the spoiler must be fitted in accordance with the installation instruction for OE
equipment in the electronic Service Information.

Important: Installation of the spoiler when fitted as an accessory:

• Observe all warnings and precautions stated in this instruction booklet:


• Thoroughly wash and dry the vehicle before starting the installation.
• Clean vehicle surface where the lip spoiler will be applied with 70% isopropyl alcohol
or Prepsol or equivalent and wipe with a dry lint free cloth.
• Remove any wax, grease or tar, which might be present.
• Dry off any surface film with a clean, lint-free cloth before the cleaning solvent
evaporates.
• On repainted vehicles, paint must be thoroughly dry and cured before applying the
spoiler to the vehicle. Check paint manufacturer's instructions for recommended cure
time and method.
• Ambient temperature of the lip spoiler and vehicle must be between 16°C to 32°C at
the time of installation and for two hours after.
• The vehicle must be out of direct sunlight to ensure even vehicle body temperature.

Painting Instructions (If Unpainted)

• Sand the decklid spoiler prior to painting. Recommend 400 - 600 grit sanding paper to activate
the adhesive properties of the primer and clean off any contaminants.
• Prior to painting, clean all surfaces to be painted using clean water and a mild detergent, do
not use lacquer, thinner or any solvent based products. Wipe completely dry.
• Best results will be achieved by wiping the areas to be painted with a tack rag just prior to
painting.

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3905346&cellId=18642... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3905346 Page 2 of 8

• Ensure the retaining clips (1) are protected by the rubber marker caps (2) to prevent over
spray contacting the retaining clips.
• Ensure the areas of the under side of the spoiler where the adhesive tape will be applied are
completely covered with paint to ensure maximum adhesion of the adhesive tape.
• Select a top coat and clear paint that is suitable for ABS (Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene).
• Automotive paint systems, such as acrylics or two packs, can be applied directly to the
components. However, some paints may require a primer. If recommendations on paint
specification are not followed, cracking of the part or degradation to the material may result.
In all paint systems, aromatic hydrocarbons and alkalies are best avoided to reduce damage to
the material properties.
• If using a paint system which requires baking, do not expose the product to temperatures
above 70°C (155°F).
• Allow a minimum of 8 hours after baking before installation on the vehicle.

Spoiler Installation

1. Apply masking tape (1) down the center of the deck lid.
2. Use a tape measure to find and mark the center of the decklid. Draw a line (2) down the
center of the decklid.

Caution: Always check scale, size and position of all templates before drilling. Failing to do
so may cause damage to the vehicle, misalignment of components or the
inability to install the accessory.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3905346&cellId=18642... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3905346 Page 3 of 8

3. From the leading edge of the decklid (2) measure 428.4 mm along the center line (1)
drawn on the tape on the decklid and mark the position on the center line.
4. Use an automatic center punch to mark the center fixing hole (3) on the decklid. Once the
hole center is marked, remove the masking tape.
5. Use a 2 mm pilot drill to drill a pilot hole.
6. Drill out the hole (3) to 6.5 mm.

7. Retain the two outer clips and the threaded studs on the underside of the lip spoiler.
8. Remove the two clip heads that are closest to the centre of the lip spoiler by scoring the
stem of the clip at the base on both sides and use pliers to break the clip head off. Ensure
that the remaining surface is flat or concave once the top section is removed.

9. Apply masking tape (1) on the decklid in the 4 places where the holes for the remaining 4
fasteners will be drilled.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3905346&cellId=18642... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3905346 Page 4 of 8

10. Use a paint pen (or similar) to apply a thin smear of paint on the tips of the threaded studs
either side of the centre stud.
11. Pass the lip spoiler centre stud into the centre hole in the decklid ensuring the ends of the
lip spoiler do not contact the decklid.
12. Align the spoiler to the decklid by ensuring both ends of the spoiler are spaced equally
from the edges of the decklid.
13. When the spoiler is aligned push the lip spoiler (1) down onto the tape on the decklid at
that position. Lift the lip spoiler off the decklid cleanly to prevent the paint marks (2)
smudging.
Note: If the paint marked dots are not clear or the holes are not spaced equally from the
edges of the decklid, replace the tape and repeat the process.
14. Use an automatic centre punch to mark the centre of the dots marked in step 13. Once the
hole centres are marked remove the masking tape at those locations. Retain the masking
tape at the outer locations for use in steps 17 through to 22.
15. Use a 2mm pilot drill to drill a pilot hole at the two centre punched locations.
16. Drill out the two holes to 7mm.

17. Fit the rubber marker caps (2) to the two end clips (5) on the lip spoiler (1).
18. Use a paint pen (or similar) to apply a thin smear of paint over the edge (4) and the two
dots (3) of the rubber marker caps.
19. Pass the lip spoiler studs through the holes in the decklid ensuring the ends of the lip
spoiler do not contact the decklid.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3905346&cellId=18642... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3905346 Page 5 of 8

20. Align the spoiler to the decklid by ensuring both ends of the spoiler are spaced equally
from the edges of the decklid.
21. When the spoiler is aligned, push the ends of the lip spoiler down onto the tape on the
decklid at that position. Lift the lip spoiler off the decklid cleanly to prevent the paint
marks smudging.
Note: If the dots in the center of the rubber cap or the outside shape of the rubber cap is
not clear or the holes are not spaced equally from the edges of the decklid, replace
the tape and repeat the process.

22. Use an automatic center punch to mark the center of the dots made by rubber caps on the
decklid. Once the hole centers are marked, remove the masking tape.
23. Use a 2 mm pilot drill to drill a pilot hole.
24. Drill out the holes to 6 mm.
25. Use a suitable tool to remove the material (1) between the two holes and make one
elongated hole 13x6.5 mm.
Note: Ensure the decklid surface remains flat when making the holes in the decklid. If the
decklid surface is deformed the retention clips will not engage.
26. De-burr all holes and use anti-corrosion stand-alone primer (no topcoat required) suitable
for Aluminum substrates, for e.g. primer Galmet Keytite Alum Primer or equivalent.

27. Once the spoiler has been painted the appropriate color and allowed to dry and harden,
clean the bottom surface of the spoiler before applying the adhesive tape /foam seals
following the cleaning instructions at the beginning of these instructions.
28. Apply the correct circular adhesive foam seals around the different fasteners.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3905346&cellId=18642... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3905346 Page 6 of 8

29. Apply the 2 adhesive tape strips (1) along the front and rear edge of the spoiler. Apply the
tape patches (2) to ends of the spoiler. Apply pressure on all tape strips/patches to ensure
permanent adhesion to spoiler. Avoid obstructing spoiler vent holes (3).

30. Trial fit the lip spoiler to the decklid and confirm that the lip spoiler fixings align with the
holes correctly.
31. Pull the tabs (1) on the adhesive backing tape across to the rear edge of the spoiler.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3905346&cellId=18642... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3905346 Page 7 of 8

32. Once pull tabs have been started, position the spoiler (1) on the deck lid, ensure there is
an equal distance from each side of the deck lid.
33. Clip the spoiler into the elongated holes and carefully pull on the tabs of the backing tape
at 45° and remove.
34. Once all the backing tape has been removed, apply pressure along the length of the
spoiler for several seconds to ensure permanent adhesion.

35. Remove the decklid carpet trim (1) by removing the ten fir tree clips (2), removing the
assist handle (3) and the spare wheel cover hook (4).

36. From inside the decklid fit the nuts (1) supplied to the decklid lip spoiler studs (2). Tighten
to 6Nm of torque.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3905346&cellId=18642... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3905346 Page 8 of 8

37. Remove the gas struts on the car one side at a time. Use a small flat-bladed tool to release
the gas strut retaining springs (1) and remove the gas strut (2). Fit the appropriate rated
gas strut for the spoiler. Clip the replacement gas strut to the decklid hinge, ensure the
gas strut has the telescopic end facing down.
38. Remove and replace the decklid hinge spring (3) with the appropriate rated springs.
39. Ensure any swarf is removed from the vehicle.
40. Refit all parts removed.

Rear End Spoiler Package Installation

PARTS LIST

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

92278254 DECK LID LIP SPOILER KIT

SPOILER ASM (Seals & caps attached) 1

NUT 3

92278255 INSTRUCTIONS 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3905346&cellId=18642... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3329282 Page 1 of 2

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Trim Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 3329282

Rear Mud Flap Guard Package Installation


TOOLS REQUIRED:

Trim release tool, Phillips screwdriver, 6mm Drill bit, Power drill

FITTING INSTRUCTIONS

1. Ensure the area inside and around the wheel arch is clean before fitting the mudflaps.
2. Remove the rear wheel. (Refer to Owner’s Handbook).
3. Remove all screws and scrivets where applicable.
4. Align the mudflap using the two centre screws to locate the mudflap, using the 6mm drill
bit to drill the two additional outer holes.
5. Remove the two existing “J” nuts (1) from the wheel house liner and replace with the “J”
nuts supplied. Add two additional “J” nuts supplied to the outer hole locations, one “J” nut
to the rib of the vehicle fascia and one “J” nut to the wheel house liner.
6. Reposition the wheel house liner and refit the screws/scrivets which are not used to
assemble the mudflaps.
7. Align the mudflaps and fit the screws supplied to fit the mudflap to the vehicle.
8. Refit the rear wheel. (Refer to the Owner’s Handbook).
9. Repeat all steps on the other side of the vehicle.
10. Place the fitting instructions in the glovebox of the vehicle.

Rear Mud Flap Guard Package Installation

PARTS LIST

PART No DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

92291333 REAR MUDFLAP KIT 1

MUDFLAP - REAR (RHS) 1

MUDFLAP - REAR (LHS) 1


© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3329282&cellId=25495... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3329282 Page 2 of 2

PARTS LIST

SCREW 8

J NUTS 8

92291335 FITTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3329282&cellId=25495... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3605378 Page 1 of 2

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Trim Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 3605378

Rear Mud Flap Guard Package Installation (Wagon &


LWB Sedan VF/WN)
TOOLS REQUIRED:

8mm Drill bit and Power drill.

FITTING INSTRUCTIONS

1. Ensure the area inside and around the wheel arch is clean before fitting the mudflaps.
2. Remove the rear wheel. (Refer to Owner’s Handbook).
3. For Wagon (VF). Remove the three existing screws and retain the screws.
Note: There is an interferences condition between the mudflap and the wheel house liner,
there is no need to trim the mudflap or liner.
4. Align the mudflap with the existing screw holes and retain with the three existing screws.
5. For Long Wheel Base (WN). Remove the two existing screws and retain screws.
6. From inside the wheel arch, centralize an 8mm drill bit in the outboard lower vacant hole
(3) position drill through the wheel arch liner.
7. Fit the “J” nut (5) supplied to the rear fascia guide bracket (6) behind the rear wheel liner.
Aligning with the hole drilled in previous step.
8. Align the mudflap with the existing screw holes and fasten using the two existing screws (1
& 2) and screw supplied (4).
9. Refit the rear wheel. (Refer to Owner’s Handbook).
10. Repeat all steps on the other side of the vehicle.
11. Place the fitting instructions in the glovebox of the vehicle.

Rear Mud Flap Guard Package Installation

PARTS LIST

PART No DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

92274043 REAR MUDFLAP KIT 1


© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3605378&cellId=25495... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3605378 Page 2 of 2

PARTS LIST

MUDFLAP - REAR (RHS) 1

MUDFLAP - REAR (LHS) 1

SCREWS 2

J NUTS 2

92274045 FITTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3605378&cellId=25495... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2578880 Page 1 of 1

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Trim Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 2578880

Rear Mud Flap Package Installation (VF SEDAN)


TOOLS REQUIRED:

Phillips screwdriver

FITTING INSTRUCTIONS

1. Ensure the area inside and around the wheel arch is clean before fitting the mudflaps.
2. Remove the rear wheel. (Refer to Owner’s Handbook).
3. Remove the 3 screws from inside the wheel arch and retain.
4. Align the mudflap (2) with the existing screw holes in the wheel arch, fit the mudflap using
the screws (1) to secure the mudflap.
5. Refit the rear wheel. (Refer to Owner’s Handbook).
6. Repeat all steps on the other side of the vehicle.
7. Place the fitting instructions in the glovebox of the vehicle.

Rear Mud Flap Package Installation

PARTS LIST

PART No DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

92267788 REAR MUDFLAP KIT 1

MUDFLAP - REAR (RHS) 1

MUDFLAP - REAR (LHS) 1

92272939 FITTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2578880&cellId=18793... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2218349 Page 1 of 6

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Trim Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 2218349

Rear Window Outside Sunshade Package Installation

TOOLS REQUIRED:

Clean Dry Cloth.

IMPORTANT: It is recommended that the rear windscreen is washed and dried before starting to fit
the Sunguard.

FITTING INSTRUCTIONS:

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218349&cellId=18859... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2218349 Page 2 of 6

1. Attach the brackets to the inside of Sunguard with screw fixings, washers, and dome nuts
provided. Note: It is important that the brackets are installed correctly. Ensure that
countersink of bracket holes remain on underside when bracket is installed. Refer to Figure
1.

2. The Sunguard must be aligned correctly and centrally. With the aid of a second person,
align the front edge of the Sunguard with the top of the rear windscreen glass. Position the
part centrally, allowing an even gap to each side of the rear windscreen glass. Refer to
Figure 2.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218349&cellId=18859... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2218349 Page 3 of 6

3. Note the tape attachment areas on rear windscreen glass. Thoroughly clean these areas
with alcohol wipe provided. Wipe away any residue with a dry clean cloth. Refer to Figure
3.

4. Apply adhesion primer to the tape attachment areas only. Carefully read the instructions
on the primer before use. Important notes: 1. Allow 5 minutes drying time of the primer.
2. Keep out of contact with skin and eyes. 3. Do not inhale or swallow. 4. Dispose of
primer immediately after use. Refer to Figure 4.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218349&cellId=18859... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2218349 Page 4 of 6

5. Peel back 50mm of tape liner from each end of tape sections on Sunguard. Fold liner at
45° to tape. Completely remove the tape liner from brackets only. It is extremely
important that exposed tape is kept free of dust, fingerprints, grease or any other
contaminant that will reduce the tapes adhesive properties. Refer to Figure 5.

IMPORTANT: Two people are required to complete installation.


6. Re-align Sunguard as in Step 2. Fit top tape strip first. Do not fully remove the tape liner
at this stage. Caution: The double sided adhesive tape used is very strong. Ensure to align
carefully before contact as repositioning will be very difficult and will reduce the strength
of the tape bond. Refer to Figure 6.

7. To correctly adhere brackets, pivot arm of bracket so that the outer edge of the base
makes the first point of contact (1). Rotate the base down so that full width of adhesive
tape contacts the back windscreen glass (2). For correct installation, it is important that
brackets are adhered this way. Refer to Figure 7.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218349&cellId=18859... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2218349 Page 5 of 6

8. Peel off remaining tape liner. Using a soft cloth, firmly rub down the taped areas, including
taped areas on plastic brackets underneath Sunguard. Apply firm pressure for maximum
adhesion. Refer to Figure 8.

9. WARNING: Allow tape to cure for 4 hours before driving vehicle. Refer to Figure 9.

Rear Window Outside Sunshade Package Installation

PARTS LIST

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

92174822 SUNGUARD 1

ALCOHOL WIPE 1

ADHESION PRIMER 1

BRACKETS 2

DOME NUTS 4

WASHERS 4

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218349&cellId=18859... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2218349 Page 6 of 6

PARTS LIST

SCREW FIXINGS 4

FD 1490 FITTING INSTRUCTION BOOKLET 1

FD 796 PROOF OF WARRANTY CARD 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218349&cellId=18859... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3318881 Page 1 of 4

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Trim Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 3318881

Side Decal Package Installation (4 - Door)


Installation Instructions Part Number

92420703

Tools Required

Note: To ensure a bubble free application, put three tiny drops of liquid dish soap into a
trigger type plastic spray bottle. Set nozzle for “fine mist”.
• Water
• Liquid Dish Soap
• Trigger-Type Spray Bottle
• Isopropyl Alcohol
• Plastic Squeegee
• Needle or Pin
• Masking Tape

Processing Instructions

1. The paint surface where the stripes are to be applied must be thoroughly washed with
warm soap and water solution.
2. If present, heavy contamination like tar should be removed with Prepsol or other quality
solvent.
© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3318881&cellId=22861... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3318881 Page 2 of 4

3. Wipe the paint surface with Isopropyl Alcohol just before starting the application. Follow
with a dry wipe.
4. Vehicle body surface and part must be 21°C or higher.
5. Use the Soap/Water mixture to thoroughly saturate the paint surface where the part is to
be applied.
6. Lay the decal face-down on a flat surface, slowly remove the heavy white liner from the
decal & spray the soap/water mixture onto the exposed adhesive.
7. Position the stripe in the location shown in Alignment Instructions and spray the paper
pre-mask surface with an even mist.
8. Thoroughly squeegee the entire surface with firm, overlapping strokes.
9. Remove the pre-mask by pulling it off at 180° or parallel to the surface.
10. If the stripe tends to lift off the paint as the pre-mask is being removed, the cause is:
◦ Too much soap in the spray bottle. Rinse it out and use less soap.
◦ Not enough pressure on the film surface from the squeegee. Increase pressure and
insure overlapping strokes.
11. For any areas that may be lifting, re-apply soap solution to the stripe, wrap a towel around
the squeegee and re-squeegee.
12. For a bubble removal, use a needle or a pin to carefully pierce the bubble to release the
trapped water.
13. Maintain vehicle body temperature of 21°C or higher for a minimum of 30 mins after decal
installation.
14. Do not use an automated/high pressure car wash until 24 hours have elapsed.

Alignment Instructions
Front Bumper Fascia Decal

1. Separate the template (4) into the LH and RH portions.


2. Tape (2) the LH template (3) into place.
3. Align the decal (1) to the template and wheel arch opening.
4. Finalize the installation. Refer to Processing Instructions.
5. Repeat for RH side.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3318881&cellId=22861... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3318881 Page 3 of 4

Body Side Front Door Decal

• Align the front door stripe to the panel opening as shown.


• Align the bottom edge of the locator to the bottom edge of the door panel.
• Finalize the installation. Refer to Processing Instructions.
• RH is Symmetrically opposite

Body Side Rear Door Decal

• Align the front tab to the installed front door stripe (inset).
• Align the bottom edge of the locator to the bottom edge of the door panel.
• Finalize the installation. Refer to Processing Instructions.
• RH is Symmetrically opposite.

Side Decal Package Installation

PARTS LIST

Item Number DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

Part Number: 92457238


(Black), 92457239 (Red)

2 Decal - FRT S/D LWR RH 1

5 Decal - FRT S/D LWR LH 1

1 Decal - RR S/D LWR RH 1

6 Decal - RR S/D LWR LH 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3318881&cellId=22861... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3318881 Page 4 of 4

PARTS LIST

3 Decal - FRT BPR Fascia RH 1

4 Decal - FRT BPR Fascia LH 1

7 Template FRT BPR Fascia 1

Instructions 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3318881&cellId=22861... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3319291 Page 1 of 4

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Trim Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 3319291

Side Decal Package Installation (Ute)


Installation Instructions Part Number

92606178

Tools Required

Note: To ensure a bubble free application, put three tiny drops of liquid dish soap into a
trigger type plastic spray bottle. Set nozzle for “fine mist”.
• Water
• Liquid Dish Soap
• Trigger-Type Spray Bottle
• Isopropyl Alcohol
• Plastic Squeegee
• Needle or Pin
• Masking Tape

Processing Instructions

1. The paint surface where the stripes are to be applied must be thoroughly washed with
warm soap and water solution.
2. If present, heavy contamination like tar should be removed with Prepsol or other quality
solvent.
© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3319291&cellId=22861... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3319291 Page 2 of 4

3. Wipe the paint surface with Isopropyl Alcohol just before starting the application. Follow
with a dry wipe.
4. Vehicle body surface and part must be 21°C or higher.
5. Use the Soap/Water mixture to thoroughly saturate the paint surface where the part is to
be applied.
6. Lay the decal face-down on a flat surface, slowly remove the heavy white liner from the
decal & spray the soap/water mixture onto the exposed adhesive.
7. Position the stripe in the location shown in Alignment Instructions and spray the paper
pre-mask surface with an even mist.
8. Thoroughly squeegee the entire surface with firm, overlapping strokes.
9. Remove the pre-mask by pulling it off at 180° or parallel to the surface.
10. If the stripe tends to lift off the paint as the pre-mask is being removed, the cause is:
◦ Too much soap in the spray bottle. Rinse it out and use less soap.
◦ Not enough pressure on the film surface from the squeegee. Increase pressure and
insure overlapping strokes.
11. For any areas that may be lifting, re-apply soap solution to the stripe, wrap a towel around
the squeegee and re-squeegee.
12. For a bubble removal, use a needle or a pin to carefully pierce the bubble to release the
trapped water.
13. Maintain vehicle body temperature of 21°C or higher for a minimum of 30 mins after decal
installation.
14. Do not use an automated/high pressure car wash until 24 hours have elapsed.

Alignment Instructions
Front Bumper Fascia Decal

1. Separate the template (4) into the LH and RH portions.


2. Tape (2) the LH template (3) into place.
3. Align the decal (1) to the template and wheel arch opening.
4. Finalize the installation. Refer to Processing Instructions.
5. Repeat for RH side.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3319291&cellId=22861... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3319291 Page 3 of 4

Body Side Front Door Decal

• Align the front door stripe to the panel opening as shown.


• Align the bottom edge of the locator to the bottom edge of the door panel.
• Finalize the installation. Refer to Processing Instructions.
• RH is Symmetrically opposite

Body Side Rear Quarter Panel Decal

• Align the front tab to the installed front door stripe (inset).
• Align the bottom edge of the locator to the bottom edge of the quarter panel.
• Finalize the installation. Refer to Processing Instructions.
• RH is Symmetrically opposite.

Side Decal Package Installation

PARTS LIST

Item Number DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

Part Number: 92457240


(Black), 92457241 (Red)

2 Decal - FRT S/D LWR RH 1

5 Decal - FRT S/D LWR LH 1

1 Decal - Q/PNL LWR RH 1

6 Decal - Q/PNL LWR LH 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3319291&cellId=22861... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3319291 Page 4 of 4

PARTS LIST

3 Decal - FRT BPR Fascia RH 1

4 Decal - FRT BPR Fascia LH 1

7 Template FRT BPR Fascia 1

Instructions 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3319291&cellId=22861... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3926892 Page 1 of 6

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Trim Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 3926892

Side Door Window Upper Air Deflector Package


Installation (Instruction P/N 92264939)
FITTING INSTRUCTIONS WEATHERSHIELD KIT:

Tools Required

Clean Soft Cloth

Note: Read instruction carefully before installation. It is strongly recommended that


installation is conducted by an authorized dealer. This product must be installed exactly
as specified in these instructions. Failure to do so may result in improper fit and/or
retention. Your Weathershields only require periodic cleaning with a mild car wash soap
and water solution. Only use cleaners, waxes or products that are labeled safe for use
on plastics. Do not use abrasive cleaners, solvents or any chemicals unless labeled safe
for plastics. PLACE THESE INSTRUCTIONS IN VEHICLE'S GLOVE BOX AFTER
INSTALLATION IS COMPLETE.

Important: For best adhesion the part must be at 20°C or above when fitting the
weathershield.

1. Clean the door frame with a mild car wash soap and water solution. Dry the door frame
using a clean soft cloth.

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3926892&cellId=25476... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3926892 Page 2 of 6

2. Lower the window. Trial fit weathershield onto door to ascertain clip positions, by locating
the weathershield 10mm from the rear edge of the mirror sail and 8mm from the top edge
of the door frame.
Important: The groove (1) in the front edge of the weathershield MUST align
with the groove (2) between the door frame and the mirror in-fill.
Mark the positions of the clip hole centers in the weathershield, onto door edge with a non
-permanent felt pen or pencil. Also note the tape attachment areas on the door frame.

3. At the previously noted top clip positions slightly push back the door rubber and gently
place the top metal clips into position between the door frame and the door rubber. Push
the door rubber back into place, check the clip holes line up with the weathershield holes.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3926892&cellId=25476... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3926892 Page 3 of 6

4. At the previously noted front clip position slightly push back the door rubber and gently
place the front metal clip into position between the mirror sail and the door rubber. Push
the door rubber back into place, check the clip hole lines up with the weathershield hole.

5. Clean the tape attachment areas on the door frame thoroughly with the alcohol wipe
provided. Wipe away residue with a clean, dry cloth. Carefully read the primer-stick
instructions, then apply primer to tape attachment areas.
Important:
Allow
◦ 5 minutes drying time of the primer.
Keep
◦ out of contact with skin and eyes.
Do◦ NOT inhale or swallow.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3926892&cellId=25476... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3926892 Page 4 of 6

Important: It will not be possible to remove the weathershield once the adhesive
contacts the prepared surface. Take great care that the weathershield
is correctly aligned with the edge of the vehicle door frame before
allowing the weathershield to contact the door frame.
6. Peel approximately 50mm of tape liner from both ends of adhesive strip. Fold tape liner at
45°.

7. Position the Weathershield on the door frame. Double check the positioning of the
Weathershield following the positioning in Step 2. Check that the holes in the metal clips
align with the holes in the weathershield, then apply light pressure to the tape areas.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3926892&cellId=25476... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3926892 Page 5 of 6

8. Gently pull away the tape liner and then firmly rub down the tape areas with the foam
applicator block 3 - 4 times to achieve maximum adhesion.

9. Attach the scrivets through the holes in the Weathershield and metal clips to fasten the
Weathershield to the metal clips, as shown.

Side Door Window Upper Air Deflector Package Installation

PARTS LIST

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

92294146 WEATHERSHIELD KIT 1

WEATHERSHIELD 1

Top Metal Clip 4

Front Metal Clip 2

Scrivets 6

ALCOHOL WIPE 2

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3926892&cellId=25476... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3926892 Page 6 of 6

PARTS LIST

Primer Stick 2

Foam Applicator Block 1

92264939 FITTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3926892&cellId=25476... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3926947 Page 1 of 5

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Trim Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 3926947

Side Door Window Upper Air Deflector Package


Installation (Instruction P/N 92280483)
FITTING INSTRUCTIONS WEATHERSHIELD KIT:

Tools Required

Clean Soft Cloth

Note: Read instruction carefully before installation. It is strongly recommended that


installation is conducted by an authorized dealer. This product must be installed exactly
as specified in these instructions. Failure to do so may result in improper fit and/or
retention. Your Weathershields only require periodic cleaning with a mild car wash soap
and water solution. Only use cleaners, waxes or products that are labeled safe for use
on plastics. Do not use abrasive cleaners, solvents or any chemicals unless labeled safe
for plastics. PLACE THESE INSTRUCTIONS IN VEHICLE'S GLOVE BOX AFTER
INSTALLATION IS COMPLETE.

Important: For best adhesion the part must be at 20°C or above when fitting the
weathershield.

1. Clean the door frame with a mild car wash soap and water solution. Dry the door frame
using a clean soft cloth.

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3926947&cellId=25476... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3926947 Page 2 of 5

2. Lower the window. Trial fit weathershield onto door to ascertain clip positions, by locating
the weathershield firmly forward against the edge of the mirror sail & 2mm from the top of
the door frame. Mark the positions of the clip hole centers in the weathershield, onto door
edge with a non-permanent felt pen or pencil. Also note the tape attachment areas on the
door frame.

3. At the previously noted clip positions slightly push back the door rubber and gently place
the top metal clips into position between the door frame and the door rubber. Push the
door rubber back into place, check the clip slots line up with the weathershield holes.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3926947&cellId=25476... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3926947 Page 3 of 5

4. Clean the tape attachment areas on the door frame thoroughly with the alcohol wipe
provided. Wipe away residue with a clean, dry cloth. Carefully read the primer-stick
instructions, then apply primer to tape attachment areas.
Important:
Allow
◦ 5 minutes drying time of the primer.
Keep
◦ out of contact with skin and eyes.
Do◦ NOT inhale or swallow.

Important: It will not be possible to remove the weathershield once the adhesive
contacts the prepared surface. Take great care that the weathershield
is correctly aligned with the edge of the vehicle door frame before
allowing the weathershield to contact the door frame.
5. Peel approximately 50mm of tape liner from both ends of adhesive strip. Fold tape liner at
45°.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3926947&cellId=25476... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3926947 Page 4 of 5

6. Position the Weathershield on the door frame. Double check the positioning of the
Weathershield following the positioning in Step 2. Check that the holes in the metal clips
align with the holes in the weathershield, then apply light pressure to the tape areas.

7. Gently pull away the tape liner and then firmly rub down the tape areas with the foam
applicator block 3 - 4 times to achieve maximum adhesion.

8. At the previously noted clip positions gently place the metal clips C into position between
the door moulding, check the clip holes line up with the weathershield slots.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3926947&cellId=25476... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3926947 Page 5 of 5

9. Attach plastic screw fixings through the slots in the Weathershield and metal clips, as
shown. Insert the hex nuts into the fitment tool and fasten the Weathershield to the clip
using the hex nut and washers provided. Use only the supplied fitment tool to tighten the
hex nuts.

Side Door Window Upper Air Deflector Package Installation

PARTS LIST

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

92294144
WEATHERSHIELD KIT 1
92294145

WEATHERSHIELD 1

Top Metal Clip 2

Bottom Metal Clip 2

Washers 4

Screw Fixings 4

Hex Nuts 4

ALCOHOL WIPE 1

Primer Stick 1

Fitment Tool 1

Foam Applicator Block 1

92280483 FITTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3926947&cellId=25476... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391341 Page 1 of 21

2014 Holden VF Sedan| VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Structural Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 3391341

Cargo Box Cover Package Installation (Slimline Type)


Installation Instructions Part Number

92271709

Hard Tonneau Cover Kit Contents

Cargo Box Cover Package Installation

PARTS LIST

DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

Hard Tonneau Cover Kit - Slimline Type 1

Tonneau Cover 1

Drill Template 1

Hinge Base Plate 2

Hinge Pin 2

Hinge Pin Locking Tab 2

Countersunk Self Tapping Screw 2

Rubber Extrusion 1

Ball Stud Screw 2

Lock Striker Bracket 2

Striker U-Bolt 2

Flat Washer 8

Nut 8

Pop Rivet 2

Gas Strut 2

Nut Insert (4 spare) 12

20mm Allen Screw 8

Fibre Washers 8

Wiring Harness 1
© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391341&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391341 Page 2 of 21

PARTS LIST

Allen Key 1

Alcohol Wipe 1

Rust Inhibitor 1

Keys 2

Water Deflector 1

Seal 2

Foam Tape 3x3mm 1

TOOLS REQUIRED:

5 mm, 10 mm & 3/16” drill bits, drill, torque wrench (¼” Drive), 13mm Spanner, TORX head
screwdriver & bits, non-acetic silicone, caulking gun, Phillips Head Screwdriver, Rivet Gun, Wrench
with 10mm & 13mm Socket, Tape Measure, Non-Permanent Marker, Heavy Duty Nut-Serter Gun
(HOLHDNSG) & Masking Tape.

FITTING INSTRUCTIONS:

Note:

• Read instructions carefully before installation.


• It is strongly recommended that installation is conducted by an authorized dealer.
• This product must be installed exactly as specified in these instructions. Failure to do
so may result in improper fit and/or retention.
• Securely latch tonneau cover before operating vehicle.
• When in the closed position, tonneau cover must be latched and tailgate must be
closed! Failure to do so could result in unexpected opening of the tonneau cover from
sudden wind gusts, which could cause damage to the vehicle and/or your tonneau
cover.
• Do not stand/sit or rest heavy objects on tonneau cover.
• Humans or animals are not to be under the closed tonneau cover at any time.
• Do not carry open volatile chemicals with tonneau cover installed.
• If contact with volatile chemicals occur clean tonneau cover with mild car wash soap
and water.

Maintenance

• Your tonneau cover only requires periodic cleaning with a mild car wash soap and water
solution.
• Only use cleaners, waxes or products that are labelled safe for use on plastics.
• Do not use abrasive cleaners, solvents or any chemicals unless labelled safe for plastics.
• The gas struts are self lubricating and should only be cleaned occasionally with a damp
cloth. Premature seal failure will result if solvents or lubricants are used to clean struts.
Gas struts must be oriented in open tonneau position with narrow end attached to the
tub.
• The locking mechanisms & latches only require occasional lubrication with Graphite
Powder.
• Do not use any other lubricants or oils. Using alternative products will void warranty.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391341&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391341 Page 3 of 21

• All installation hardware and fasteners must be checked every so often for tightness.
• Check light operation periodically and whenever the tonneau is removed and reinstalled.
• Do not cycle key fob continuously or the actuator for operation of the remote locking
system will burn out.

Painting Instructions (If Unpainted)

• Sand tonneau cover prior to painting recommend 500 grit using an orbital type sander.
• Prior to painting, clean all surfaces to be painted using clean water and a mild detergent,
do not use lacquer, thinner or any solvent based products. Wipe completely dry.
• Best results will be achieved by wiping the areas to be painted with a tack rag just prior
to painting.
• Select a top coat and clear paint that is suitable for ABS (Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-
Styrene).
• Automotive paint systems, such as acrylics or two pack, can be applied directly to the
components. However, some paints may require a primer. if recommendations on paint
specification are not followed, cracking of the part or degradation to the material may
result. In all paint systems, aromatic hydrocarbons and alkalies are best avoided to
reduce damage to the material properties.
• If using a paint system which requires baking, do not expose the product to
temperatures above 70°C/155°F.
• Allow a minimum of 8 hours after baking before installation on the vehicle.
Note: Place these instructions in vehicles glove box after installation is complete.

1. Thoroughly clean and dry installation area (1).

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391341&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391341 Page 4 of 21

2. Using a tape measure and a non-permanent marker, locate and mark the center point (4) of the
vehicle header rail.
3. Position the drill template (1) on top of the header rail, aligning it with the rear edge of the
header rail (2) and the notch in the template (3) to the center point marked (4). Use masking
tape to hold the template in position.

4. Fit hinge base plates (2) into the cutouts in the drill template (1).
5. Mark the four vertical holes in each of the hinge base plates on the vehicle header rail, remove
hinge base plates. Do not remove the drill template.
6. Centre punch the hole positions and drill 5mm pilot holes followed by 10mm at the eight marked
positions.
7. Remove any swarf and apply a high Zinc content rust inhibitor to all drilled holes..

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391341&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391341 Page 5 of 21

8. The next step is very important, please take the time to ensure that it is done correctly.
Note: It is recommended that you purchase Holden special tool (HOLHDNSG) hand lever Heavy
Duty Nut-Serter Gun to assist with this process.
Install the nutserts into the header rail.

9. Apply non-acetic silicone to the underside of the base plates (1) and position on the vehicle
inside the drill template cutouts, aligning the four holes on the hinge with those in the header
rail.
10. Align the hinge pin locking tab (3) with the top fixing holes with the tab to the left hand side of
the hinge base plate (1). Secure each of the hinge plates with four 20mm Allen screws (5) and
fibre washers (4). Do not tighten.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391341&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391341 Page 6 of 21

11. Remove drill template.


Caution: Use the correct fastener in the correct location. Replacement fasteners must be the
correct part number for that application. Fasteners requiring replacement or fasteners
requiring the use of thread locking compound or sealant are identified in the service
procedure. Do not use paints, lubricants, or corrosion inhibitors on fasteners or
fastener joint surfaces unless specified. These coatings affect fastener torque and joint
clamping force and may damage the fastener. Use the correct tightening sequence and
specifications when installing fasteners in order to avoid damage to parts and systems.
12. Drive a countersunk self-tapping screw (2) through the hole on the top face of both hinge base
plates (1).
Tighten
Tighten the self-tapping screws to 3 Y.
13. Tighten the 8 Allen head bolts to 8 Y.

14. Remove the three tie down brackets (1) along the right side of the vehicle tray using a TORX
head screwdriver. Retain the three tie down brackets (1) and two of the TORX head screws (2).
15. Remove the center tie down from the left hand side of the vehicle tray and discard the retaining
bolt.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391341&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391341 Page 7 of 21

16. Open the vehicle’s tailgate (3).


17. Remove the two push scrivets (1) from the right hand side of the vehicle tray and peel back the
rubber tailgate seal (2) on the side of the tailgate (3) entry.

18. Lift and pull back to remove the bed liner from the vehicle.
19. Use a 45 mm hole saw to drill a hole (1) in the centre of the flat area of the bed liner above the
second rib in from the right on the front face of the bed liner.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391341&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391341 Page 8 of 21

20. Feed the hard tonneau cover wiring harness (1) through the hole from inside the bed liner to the
rear surface. Seat the grommet on the hole.

21. Position the harness and plug horizontally directed to the centre of the vehicle. Drill the fixing
holes and use the fixings supplied with the wiring harness to mount the plug to the bed liner.

22. Tape the two-way high mount sports bar brake light connector on the hard tonneau wiring
harness back to the hard tonneau harness (1).
23. Tape the harness along the side of the bed liner.
24. Feed the spade terminal (3) from the hard tonneau wiring harness through the tray liner (1)
center tie down bracket opening (2).

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391341&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391341 Page 9 of 21

25. Trial fit the water deflector (1) to the under side of the painted header rail (3) with the water
deflector protruding approximately 45 mm out from the header rail. Note tape attachment areas.
Remove the water deflector (1) and clean the header rail (3) in tape areas as noted, with the
alcohol wipe provided and wipe away residue with a dry clean cloth.
26. Remove five protective tape liners (2) from water deflector (1) and install on the header rail (3).
Apply firm pressure to water deflector over tape areas to ensure maximum adhesion to the
vehicle.
27. Reinstall the bed liner to the vehicle.

28. Locate the WHITE 2-way remote fuel door wiring connectors (1) on the vehicle, directly behind
the wheel arch and unclip from the vehicle.

29. Connect the WHITE 2-way connectors (2) on the hard tonneau wiring harness to the white 2–
way connectors (1) from the vehicle. Clip one of the white 2–way connectors back to where they
were unclipped from the vehicle.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391341&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391341 Page 10 of 21

30. Locate the earth wire terminal (1) behind the tray liner, near the vehicle’s tailgate and remove
the bolt (2) securing the terminal.
31. Add the breakout harness earth wire (3) to the earth bolt and reattach the two wiring earths to
the vehicle.
Tighten
Tighten the bolt to 8 Y.

32. Remove the terminator block (3) from the 4-way connector (2) rear of the right hand wheel arch
and connect the 4-way hard tonneau harness connector (1) to the vehicle harness 4-way
connector.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391341&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391341 Page 11 of 21

33. Re-install the front tie down bracket (1) with torx head screw (2).
Tighten
Tighten the screw to 8 Y.
34. Re-fit the two push scrivets and re-install the rubber tailgate seal.

35. Clean the top surface of the header rail (1) with the alcohol wipe provided and wipe away residue
with a dry clean cloth.
36. Trial fit the rubber extrusion (2) to the header rail (1), the rubber extrusion should fit between
the vehicle sail plane trims, position the rubber extrusion against the back of the hinges (3). use
the rubber extrusion as a guide and draw a straight line along the header rail with a non-
permanent marker (5).
37. Remove the protective lining from the rubber extrusion and attach it to the header rail (1), using
the permanent marker line as a guide (4). Rub down firmly to ensure permanent adhesion.
Note: Ensure the slant (5) in the rubber extrusion (2) faces the rear of vehicle.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391341&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391341 Page 12 of 21

38. Clean the top surface of the sail plane (1) with the alcohol wipe provided and wipe away residue
with a dry cloth.
39. Remove the protective lining from the seal (3) and attach it to the sail plane (1). Trim the rubber
extrusion as required. starting at the end of the rubber extrusion (2) and run along the inside
edge of the sail plane and down over the side of the vehicle. Rub down firmly to ensure good
adhesion.
40. Fit the small 3x3mm foam tape (4) to the gap between the sail plane (1) and the side tray rail
(5).
Note: Ensure the lip on the seal (3) is positioned inboard on the vehicle and the seal overlaps
the rubber extrusion (2). Trim seal and foam tape to length if required with scissors.
Repeat process for other side of the vehicle.

41. Apply non-acetic silicon (1) to the rubber extrusions where they intersect, vehicle and header
rail. The sealant is used to close up gaps in the assembly to prevent water entering vehicle tray
area. Repeat for other side of vehicle.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391341&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391341 Page 13 of 21

42. Position the right hand side center tie down bracket (1) and drill a 3mm hole (5) in the tray liner
(2) just touching the top of the tie down bracket. remove the bracket and use the drill to make a
channel from the hole to the tie down opening in the liner.
43. Cable tie the wire 150mm (4) back from the wire terminal, place the wire in the hole with the
cable tie behind the tray liner and refit the tie down bracket using the ball stud screw (3). Fit the
tie down bracket on the other side of the vehicle using the second ball stud screw (3).
Tighten
Tighten to Torque 10 N-m.

Note: Ensure the vehicle tailgate is OPEN before installing tonneau cover, the cover must not be
closed until all adjustments have been carried out and the installation is complete.
44. Position the striker plate (1) on to the rear tie down bracket (4) and fit the assembly to the rear
tie down mounting position. Ensure the striker plate is parallel with the top of the vehicle tray (2)
and tighten to 10 Y.
45. Drill a 5mm hole and rivet (3) the striker to the tray liner (2). Repeat on other side of vehicle,
with the lock striker bracket positioned correctly.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391341&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391341 Page 14 of 21

Note: Two people are required to lift and fit tonneau cover onto the vehicle.
46. Fit the tonneau cover (1) and secure with hinge pins (2). Ensure hinge pins “Click” into position.

47. Check the tonneau cover (1) is sitting square on the vehicle tray by measuring the tonneau
cover overhang at the front and the back of the tonneau cover on both sides.

48. If adjustment is required, loosen the tonneau cover hinge bolts (2) and re-position tonneau
cover centrally and square to the vehicle tray. Re-tighten hinge screws. Recheck and adjust until
correct fit.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391341&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391341 Page 15 of 21

Tighten
Tighten to 5 Y.

49. Attach gas struts (2) to the tonneau cover, clip the gas strut cylinder to the tonneau cover and
the shaft of the gas strut to the ball stud screw on the center vehicle tie down bracket.
50. Attach the two wires to the terminals on each end of the gas strut on the right hand side of the
vehicle.

51. Run nuts (3) up to the ends of the threads of the two U-bolts (2) and sit the U-bolts into the
latch brackets (1).

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391341&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391341 Page 16 of 21

52. Put the tonneau cover latches in the locked position and close the tonneau cover.
53. Inspect locking mechanism alignment with the U-bolts See view ‘A’ no adjustment is required. If
the latches do not align correctly See view ‘B’ and ‘C’ with the U-bolts adjustment is required. If
no adjustments required go to step 58.

54. Loosen the latch retaining bolts (1) and slide the latches along until correctly aligned.
Tighten
Tighten the screws to 4 N-m of torque.

55. Once the latches have been adjusted it will be necessary to re-adjust the latch release
mechanism, Remove inspection cover (1) by removing scrivets (2) and rotating cover counter
clockwise.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391341&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391341 Page 17 of 21

56. Release latch control rods from the locking mechanism by releasing the plastic retainer clips (1)
and pulling the rod (2) out of the locking mechanism.

57. Rotate the ends of the control rod to lengthen or reduce the length of the control rods as
required. The control rods should be in the centre of the hole (1) in the latch when correctly
adjusted. Once the adjustment is complete refit the control rod retaining plastic clips and
reconnect the actuator.

58. Refit the inspection cover and scrivets.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391341&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391341 Page 18 of 21

59. Release the tonneau cover latches (1) and close them again with the U-bolts (2) engaged in the
latch. Run the nuts down the U-bolts until the nuts are in contact with the striker plates. Ensure
the top of the U-bolts are parallel with the surface of the striker plate. Use the spring washer
and nuts supplied to fix the U-bolts in position.
Tighten
Tighten to Torque 4 N-m.

60. Check alignment and release mechanism operation.


Note: Tonneau cover has 2 stage locks. Ensure tonneau engages with second stage of latch. For
best results, spend time to tune the lock striker position up and down to provide minimal
movement when the tonneau is fully closed with tailgate up in the closed position.
61. Connect the hard tonneau harness connector (2) to the 4-way connectors located at the front of
the tub.

62. Adjust the tonneau cover interior light electrical connector on the right hand side gas strut.
Loosen the screw (2) on the driver’s side gas strut terminal housing (1), until it moves up and
down the strut freely. Open the tonneau cover and slide the electrical connector housing up the
strut, gently close the tonneau cover.
63. Inspect the driver’s side gas strut and ensure the terminal housing (1) has come into contact
with the gas strut’s cylinder (3) and that the interior light (4) has gone off. Open tonneau cover
and tighten screw (2) on terminal housing (1). Check the operation several times to ensure
correct operation. Ensure light operation is checked periodically and whenever the tonneau is
removed and reinstalled.
64. Manually lock and unlock the tonneau cover using the key supplied (tonneau cover is supplied in
the unlocked position). Check operation of the central unlocking mechanism by pressing the lock
and unlock on your vehicle’s key. Test operation of lock mechanism by pressing tonneau’s push
button after you have pressed “Lock” on the vehicle’s key, and then again after you have
pressed “Unlock” on the vehicle’s key.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391341&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391341 Page 19 of 21

Removal Of Tonneau Cover

Note: Two people are required to lift and remove the tonneau cover from the vehicle.
1. Disconnect wiring harness at the front of the tray (1) and disconnect the lower terminal (2)
from the right hand side gas strut. Detach both gas struts (5) from the vehicle tray by
inserting a small screwdriver and releasing the spring clip pressure (4) on the gas strut (5).
Note: Do not remove the spring clip (4). Only a small amount of levering is required to
detach.

2. Remove hinge pins (1) and remove tonneau cover (2).

Replacement Of Tonneau Cover

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391341&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391341 Page 20 of 21

Note: Two people are required to lift and fit the tonneau cover onto the vehicle.
1. Fit tonneau cover (1) and secure with hinge pins (2). Ensure hinge pins “Click” into
position.

2. Attach gas struts (2) by clipping into place. Ensure narrow end mounts to the vehicle.
Connect wiring harness (3) / (1) to both terminals of driver’s side gas struts.
3. Connect the 4-way connectors (4) to the connector in the front of the vehicle tray.
4. Recheck latch alignment.
5. Check the interior light function and adjust if required.
Note: Incorrect interior light operation can flatten the vehicle battery.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391341&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391341 Page 21 of 21

6. Write down the key identification code and provide to the owner of the vehicle for future
reference.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391341&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391931 Page 1 of 23

2014 Holden VF Sedan| VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Structural Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 3391931

Cargo Box Cover Package Installation (Twin Hump


Type)
Installation Instructions Part Number

92271710

Hard Tonneau Cover Kit Contents

Cargo Box Cover Package Installation

PARTS LIST

DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

Hard Tonneau Cover Kit - Twin Hump Type 1

Tonneau Cover 1

Drill Template 1

Hinge Base Plate 2

Hinge Pin 2

Hinge Pin Locking Tab 2

Countersunk Self Tapping Screw 2

Rubber Extrusion 1

Ball Stud Screw 2

Lock Striker Bracket 2

Striker U-Bolt 2

Flat Washer 8

Nut 8

Pop Rivet 2

Gas Strut 2

Nut Insert (4 spare) 12

20mm Allen Screw 8

Fibre Washers 8

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391931&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391931 Page 2 of 23

PARTS LIST

Wiring Harness 1

Allen Key 1

Alcohol Wipe 1

Rust Inhibitor 1

Keys 2

Water Deflector 1

Seal 2

Foam Tape 3x3mm 1

TOOLS REQUIRED:

5 mm, 10 mm & 3/16” drill bits, drill, torque wrench (¼” Drive), 13mm Spanner, TORX head
screwdriver & bits, non-acetic silicone, caulking gun, Phillips Head Screwdriver, Rivet Gun, Wrench
with 10mm & 13mm Socket, Tape Measure, Non-Permanent Marker, Heavy Duty Nut-Serter Gun
(HOLHDNSG) & Masking Tape.

FITTING INSTRUCTIONS:

Note:

• Read instructions carefully before installation.


• It is strongly recommended that installation is conducted by an authorized dealer.
• This product must be installed exactly as specified in these instructions. Failure to do
so may result in improper fit and/or retention.
• Securely latch tonneau cover before operating vehicle.
• When in the closed position, tonneau cover must be latched and tailgate must be
closed! Failure to do so could result in unexpected opening of the tonneau cover from
sudden wind gusts, which could cause damage to the vehicle and/or your tonneau
cover.
• Do not stand/sit or rest heavy objects on tonneau cover.
• Humans or animals are not to be under the closed tonneau cover at any time.
• Do not carry open volatile chemicals with tonneau cover installed.
• If contact with volatile chemicals occur clean tonneau cover with mild car wash soap
and water.

Maintenance

• Your tonneau cover only requires periodic cleaning with a mild car wash soap and water
solution.
• Only use cleaners, waxes or products that are labelled safe for use on plastics.
• Do not use abrasive cleaners, solvents or any chemicals unless labelled safe for plastics.
• The gas struts are self lubricating and should only be cleaned occasionally with a damp
cloth. Premature seal failure will result if solvents or lubricants are used to clean struts.
Gas struts must be oriented in open tonneau position with narrow end attached to the
tub.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391931&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391931 Page 3 of 23

• The locking mechanisms & latches only require occasional lubrication with Graphite
Powder.
• Do not use any other lubricants or oils. Using alternative products will void warranty.
• All installation hardware and fasteners must be checked every so often for tightness.
• Check light operation periodically and whenever the tonneau is removed and reinstalled.
• Do not cycle key fob continuously or the actuator for operation of the remote locking
system will burn out.

Painting Instructions (If Unpainted)

• Sand tonneau cover prior to painting recommend 500 grit using an orbital type sander.
• Prior to painting, clean all surfaces to be painted using clean water and a mild detergent,
do not use lacquer, thinner or any solvent based products. Wipe completely dry.
• Best results will be achieved by wiping the areas to be painted with a tack rag just prior
to painting.
• Select a top coat and clear paint that is suitable for ABS (Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-
Styrene).
• Automotive paint systems, such as acrylics or two pack, can be applied directly to the
components. However, some paints may require a primer. if recommendations on paint
specification are not followed, cracking of the part or degradation to the material may
result. In all paint systems, aromatic hydrocarbons and alkalies are best avoided to
reduce damage to the material properties.
• If using a paint system which requires baking, do not expose the product to
temperatures above 70°C/155°F.
• Allow a minimum of 8 hours after baking before installation on the vehicle.
Note: Place these instructions in vehicles glove box after installation is complete.

1. Thoroughly clean and dry installation area (1).

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391931&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391931 Page 4 of 23

2. Using a tape measure and a non-permanent marker, locate and mark the center point (4) of the
vehicle header rail.
3. Position the drill template (1) on top of the header rail, aligning it with the rear edge of the
header rail (2) and the notch in the template (3) to the center point marked (4). Use masking
tape to hold the template in position.

4. Fit hinge base plates (2) into the cutouts in the drill template (1).
5. Mark the four vertical holes in each of the hinge base plates on the vehicle header rail, remove
hinge base plates. Do not remove the drill template.
6. Centre punch the hole positions and drill 5mm pilot holes followed by 10mm at the eight marked
positions.
7. Remove any swarf and apply a high Zinc content rust inhibitor to all drilled holes..

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391931&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391931 Page 5 of 23

8. The next step is very important, please take the time to ensure that it is done correctly.
Note: It is recommended that you purchase Holden special tool (HOLHDNSG) hand lever Heavy
Duty Nut-Serter Gun to assist with this process.
Install the nutserts into the header rail.

9. Apply non-acetic silicone to the underside of the base plates (1) and position on the vehicle
inside the drill template cutouts, aligning the four holes on the hinge with those in the header
rail.
10. Align the hinge pin locking tab (3) with the top fixing holes with the tab to the left hand side of
the hinge base plate (1). Secure each of the hinge plates with four 20mm Allen screws (5) and
fibre washers (4). Do not tighten.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391931&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391931 Page 6 of 23

11. Remove drill template.


Caution: Use the correct fastener in the correct location. Replacement fasteners must be the
correct part number for that application. Fasteners requiring replacement or fasteners
requiring the use of thread locking compound or sealant are identified in the service
procedure. Do not use paints, lubricants, or corrosion inhibitors on fasteners or
fastener joint surfaces unless specified. These coatings affect fastener torque and joint
clamping force and may damage the fastener. Use the correct tightening sequence and
specifications when installing fasteners in order to avoid damage to parts and systems.
12. Drive a countersunk self-tapping screw (2) through the hole on the top face of both hinge base
plates (1).
Tighten
Tighten the self-tapping screws to 3 Y.
13. Tighten the 8 Allen head bolts to 8 Y.

14. Remove the three tie down brackets (1) along the right side of the vehicle tray using a TORX
head screwdriver. Retain the three tie down brackets (1) and two of the TORX head screws (2).
15. Remove the center tie down from the left hand side of the vehicle tray and discard the retaining
bolt.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391931&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391931 Page 7 of 23

16. Open the vehicle’s tailgate (3).


17. Remove the two push scrivets (1) from the right hand side of the vehicle tray and peel back the
rubber tailgate seal (2) on the side of the tailgate (3) entry.

18. Lift and pull back to remove the bed liner from the vehicle.
19. Use a 45 mm hole saw to drill a hole (1) in the centre of the flat area of the bed liner above the
second rib in from the right on the front face of the bed liner.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391931&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391931 Page 8 of 23

20. Feed the hard tonneau cover wiring harness (1) through the hole from inside the bed liner to the
rear surface. Seat the grommet on the hole.

21. Position the harness and plug horizontally directed to the centre of the vehicle. Drill the fixing
holes and use the fixings supplied with the wiring harness to mount the plug to the bed liner.

22. Tape the two-way high mount sports bar brake light connector on the hard tonneau wiring
harness back to the hard tonneau harness (1).
23. Tape the harness along the side of the bed liner.
24. Feed the spade terminal (3) form the hard tonneau wiring harness through the tray liner (1)
center tie down bracket opening (2).

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391931&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391931 Page 9 of 23

25. Trial fit the water deflector (1) to the under side of the painted header rail (3) with the water
deflector protruding approximately 45 mm out from the header rail. Note tape attachment areas.
Remove the water deflector (1) and clean the header rail (3) in tape areas as noted, with the
alcohol wipe provided and wipe away residue with a dry clean cloth.
26. Remove five protective tape liners (2) from water deflector (1) and install on the header rail (3).
Apply firm pressure to water deflector over tape areas to ensure maximum adhesion to the
vehicle.
27. Reinstall the bed liner to the vehicle.

28. Locate the WHITE 2-way remote fuel door wiring connector (1) on the vehicle, directly behind
the wheel arch and unclip from the vehicle.

29. Connect the WHITE 2-way connectors (2) on the hard tonneau wiring harness to the white 2-way
connectors (1) form the vehicle. Clip one of the white 2-way connectors back to where they were
unclipped from the vehicle.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391931&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391931 Page 10 of 23

30. Locate the earth wire terminal (1) behind the tray liner, near the vehicle’s tailgate and remove
the bolt (2) securing the terminal.
31. Add the breakout harness earth wire (3) to the earth bolt and reattach the two wiring earths to
the vehicle.
Tighten
Tighten the bolt to 8 Y.

32. Remove the terminator block (3) from the 4-way connector (2) rear of the right hand wheel arch
and connect the 4-way hard tonneau harness connector (1) to the vehicle harness 4-way
connector.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391931&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391931 Page 11 of 23

33. Re-install the front tie down bracket (1) with torx head screw (2).
Tighten
Tighten the screw to 8 Y.

34. Note the small cut-out section at each corner of the drill template (1). With alcohol wipe
provided, clean the vehicle paint surface at this area and the adjacent area on the vehicle sail-
plane (3). Wipe dry with a clean cloth.
35. Remove the protective liner from the small rubber extrusion piece (2) and attach it to the vehicle
as shown, fitting it into cut-out in drill template (1) and across the vehicle sail-plane (3). Rub
down firmly to ensure good adhesion.
36. Repeat for other side of vehicle, then remove the drill template (1).

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391931&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391931 Page 12 of 23

37. Measure and mark a line (2) on the sail plane (3) 60mm from the header rail (1).
38. Remove tape liner from closed cell foam (4) and align with previously marked line (2) and attach
it to the sail plane (3). Rub down firmly to ensure good adhesion.
39. Repeat for the other side of the vehicle.
40. Remove the drilling template.

41. Trial fit the right hand corner piece (1) and note the tape attachment areas on the vehicle. Clean
these areas with the alcohol wipe provided and wipe away residue with a dry clean cloth.
42. Apply approximately 6mm bead of non-acetic silicon (2) to the right hand corner piece (1).
43. Remove all the protective tape linings (3) from the underside of the corner piece.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391931&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391931 Page 13 of 23

44. Fit the right hand corner piece (1) to the vehicle and rub down tape areas with a soft clean cloth
to ensure good adhesion. Immediately clean up any silicon that squeezes out of the corner piece
(1) with a clean cloth and alcohol wipe. repeat steps 38 to 41 for the other side of the vehicle.

45. Clean the top surface of the header rail (1) with the alcohol wipe provided and wipe away residue
with a dry clean cloth.
46. Trial fit the rubber extrusion (2) to the header rail (1), the rubber extrusion should fit between
the vehicle sail plane trims, position the rubber extrusion against the back of the hinges (3). Use
the rubber extrusion as a guide and draw a straight line along the header rail with a non-
permanent marker (5).
47. Remove the protective lining from the rubber extrusion and attach it to the header rail (1), using
the permanent marker line as a guide (4). Rub down firmly to ensure permanent adhesion.
Note: Ensure the slant (5) in the rubber extrusion (2) faces the rear of vehicle.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391931&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391931 Page 14 of 23

48. Apply non-acetic silicon (2) to the corner pieces (3), rubber extrusions (1), vehicle and header
rail. The sealant is used to close up gaps in the assembly to prevent water entering vehicle bed
area. Repeat for other side of vehicle.
Note: Ensure the bead of silicon does not protrude through the gap between the corner piece (3)
and the vehicle to become visible from above the corner piece (3).

49. Position the right hand side center tie down bracket (1) and drill a 3mm hole (5) in the tray liner
(2) just touching the top of the tie down bracket. remove the bracket and use the drill to make a
channel from the hole to the tie down opening in the liner.
50. Cable tie the wire 150mm (4) back from the wire terminal, place the wire in the hole with the
cable tie behind the tray liner and refit the tie down bracket using the ball stud screw (3). Fit the
tie down bracket on the other side of the vehicle using the second ball stud screw (3).
Tighten
Tighten to Torque 10 N-m.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391931&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391931 Page 15 of 23

Note: Ensure the vehicle tailgate is OPEN before installing tonneau cover, the cover must not be
closed until all adjustments have been carried out and the installation is complete.
51. Position the striker plate (1) on to the rear tie down bracket (4) and fit the assembly to the rear
tie down mounting position. Ensure the striker plate is parallel with the top of the vehicle tray (2)
and tighten to 10 Y.
52. Drill a 5mm hole and rivet (3) the striker to the tray liner (2). Repeat on other side of vehicle,
with the lock striker bracket positioned correctly.

Note: Two people are required to lift and fit tonneau cover onto the vehicle.
53. Fit the tonneau cover (1) and secure with hinge pins (2). Ensure hinge pins “Click” into position.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391931&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391931 Page 16 of 23

54. Check the tonneau cover (1) is sitting square on the vehicle tray by measuring the tonneau
cover overhang at the front and the back of the tonneau cover on both sides.

55. If adjustment is required, loosen the tonneau cover hinge bolts (2) and re-position tonneau
cover centrally and square to the vehicle tray. Re-tighten hinge screws. Recheck and adjust until
correct fit.
Tighten
Tighten to 5 Y.

56. Attach gas struts (2) to the tonneau cover, clip the gas strut cylinder to the tonneau cover and
the shaft of the gas strut to the ball stud screw on the center vehicle tie down bracket.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391931&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391931 Page 17 of 23

57. Attach the two wires to the terminals on each end of the gas strut on the right hand side of the
vehicle.

58. Run nuts (3) up to the ends of the threads of the two U-bolts (2) and sit the U-bolts into the
latch brackets (1).

59. Put the tonneau cover latches in the locked position and close the tonneau cover.
60. Inspect locking mechanism alignment with the U-bolts See view ‘A’ no adjustment is required. If
the latches do not align correctly See view ‘B’ and ‘C’ with the U-bolts adjustment is required. If
no adjustments required go to step 65.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391931&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391931 Page 18 of 23

61. Loosen the latch retaining bolts (1) and slide the latches along until correctly aligned.
Tighten
Tighten the screws to 4 N-m of torque.

62. Once the latches have been adjusted it will be necessary to re-adjust the latch release
mechanism, Remove inspection cover (3) by removing scrivets (4) and rotating cover counter
clockwise.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391931&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391931 Page 19 of 23

63. Release latch control rods from the locking mechanism by releasing the plastic retainer clips (1)
and pulling the rod (2) out of the locking mechanism.

64. Rotate the ends of the control rod to lengthen or reduce the length of the control rods as
required. The control rods should be in the centre of the hole (1) in the latch when correctly
adjusted. Once the adjustment is complete refit the control rod retaining plastic clips and
reconnect the actuator.

65. Refit the inspection cover and scrivets.


66. Release the tonneau cover latches (1) and close them again with the U-bolts (2) engaged in the
latch. Run the nuts down the U-bolts until the nuts are in contact with the striker plates. Ensure
the top of the U-bolts are parallel with the surface of the striker plate. Use the spring washer
and nuts supplied to fix the U-bolts in position.
Tighten
Tighten to Torque 4 N-m.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391931&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391931 Page 20 of 23

67. Check alignment and release mechanism operation.


Note: Tonneau cover has 2 stage locks. Ensure tonneau engages with second stage of latch. For
best results, spend time to tune the lock striker position up and down to provide minimal
movement when the tonneau is fully closed with tailgate up in the closed position.
68. Connect the hard tonneau harness connector to the 4-way connectors (1) located at the front of
the tub.

69. Adjust the tonneau cover interior light electrical connector on the right hand side gas strut.
Loosen the screw (2) on the driver’s side gas strut terminal housing (1), until it moves up and
down the strut freely. Open the tonneau cover and slide the electrical connector housing up the
strut, gently close the tonneau cover.
70. Inspect the driver’s side gas strut and ensure the terminal housing (1) has come into contact
with the gas strut’s cylinder (3) and that the interior light has gone off. Open tonneau cover and
tighten screw (2) on terminal housing (1). Check the operation several times to ensure correct
operation. Ensure light operation is checked periodically and whenever the tonneau is removed
and reinstalled.
71. Manually lock and unlock the tonneau cover using the key supplied (tonneau cover is supplied in
the unlocked position). Check operation of the central unlocking mechanism by pressing the lock
and unlock on your vehicle’s key. Test operation of lock mechanism by pressing tonneau’s push
button after you have pressed “Lock” on the vehicle’s key, and then again after you have
pressed “Unlock” on the vehicle’s key.

Removal Of Tonneau Cover

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391931&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391931 Page 21 of 23

Note: Two people are required to lift and remove the tonneau cover from the vehicle.
1. Disconnect wiring harness at the front of the tray (1) and disconnect the lower terminal (2)
from the right hand side gas strut. Detach both gas struts (5) from the vehicle tray by
inserting a small screwdriver and releasing the spring clip pressure (4) on the gas strut (5).
Note: Do not remove the spring clip (4). Only a small amount of levering is required to
detach.

2. Remove hinge pins (1) and remove tonneau cover (2).

Replacement Of Tonneau Cover

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391931&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391931 Page 22 of 23

Note: Two people are required to lift and fit the tonneau cover onto the vehicle.
1. Fit tonneau cover (1) and secure with hinge pins (2). Ensure hinge pins “Click” into
position.

2. Attach gas struts (2) by clipping into place. Ensure narrow end mounts to the vehicle.
Connect wiring harness (3) / (1) to both terminals of driver’s side gas struts.
3. Connect the 4-way connectors (4) to the connector in the front of the vehicle tray.
4. Recheck latch alignment.
5. Check the interior light function and adjust if required.
Note: Incorrect interior light operation can flatten the vehicle battery.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391931&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3391931 Page 23 of 23

6. Write down the key identification code and provide to the owner of the vehicle for future
reference.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3391931&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3397247 Page 1 of 31

2014 Holden VF Sedan| VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Structural Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 3397247

Cargo Box Cover Package Installation (Three Piece


Type)
Table 1: Cargo Box Cover Package Installation
Table 2: Cargo Box Cover Package Installation

Installation Instructions Part Number

92271711

Hard Tonneau Cover Kit Contents

Cargo Box Cover Package Installation

PARTS LIST

DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

Hard Tonneau Cover Kit - 3 Piece Type - With


1
Sports Bar

Tonneau Cover 1

Right Hand Corner Piece 1

Left Hand Corner Piece 1

Header Plate Extrusion 1

Hinge Pin 2

Rubber Extrusion 1

Ball Stud Screw 2

Lock Striker Bracket 2

Striker U-Bolt 2

Jacking Bracket 2

M8 Hex Head Bolt 2

M8 Hex Head Nut 4

Hex Head Self Tapping Screw 4

M6 Hex Head Nut 8

M6x30 mm Screw 4

M6 Flat Washer 8
© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3397247&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3397247 Page 2 of 31

PARTS LIST

M6 Spring Washer 4

Clear Protection Pad 2

Pop Rivet 6

Gas Strut 2

Nut Insert (4 spare) 13

20 mm Allen Screw 9

Fibre Washers 9

M6 Countersunk Self Tapping Screw 5

Wiring Harness 1

Alcohol Wipe 2

Rust Inhibitor 1

Keys 2

Water Deflector 1

Foam Tape 1

M6 Large Flat Washer 4

Brake Light Decal 1

Allen Key 1

TOOLS REQUIRED:

5 mm, 10 mm & 3/16” drill bits, drill, torque wrench, TORX head screwdriver & bits, caulking gun,
non-acetic silicone, tape measure, 10 mm & 13 mm spanner, non-permanent marker, phillips head
& flat tip screwdriver, rivet gun, 10 mm & 13 mm socket & driver, and nutsert installation tool
(HOLHDNSG).

FITTING INSTRUCTIONS:

Note:

• Read instructions carefully before installation.


• It is strongly recommended that installation is conducted by an authorized dealer.
• This product must be installed exactly as specified in these instructions. Failure to do
so may result in improper fit and/or retention.
• Humans or animals are not to be under the closed tonneau cover at any time.
• Do not stand/sit or rest heavy objects on tonneau cover.
• Securely latch tonneau cover before operating vehicle.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3397247&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3397247 Page 3 of 31

• When in the closed position, tonneau cover must be latched and tailgate must be
closed! Failure to do so could result in unexpected opening of the tonneau cover from
sudden wind gusts, which could cause damage to the vehicle and/or your tonneau
cover.
• Do not carry open volatile chemicals with tonneau cover installed.
• If contact with volatile chemicals occur clean tonneau cover with mild car wash soap
and water.

Maintenance

• Your tonneau cover only requires periodic cleaning with a mild car wash soap and water
solution.
• Only use cleaners, waxes or products that are labelled safe for use on plastics.
• Do not use abrasive cleaners, solvents or any chemicals unless labelled safe for plastics.
• The gas struts are self lubricating and should only be cleaned occasionally with a damp
cloth. Premature seal failure will result if solvents or lubricants are used to clean struts.
Gas struts must be oriented in open tonneau position with narrow end attached to the
tub.
• The locking mechanisms & latches only require occasional lubrication with Graphite
Powder.
• Do not use any other lubricants or oils.
• Using alternative products will void warranty.
• All installation hardware and fasteners must be checked every so often for tightness.
• Check light operation periodically and whenever the tonneau is removed and reinstalled.
• Do not cycle key fob continuously or the actuator for operation of the remote locking
system will burn out.

Painting Instructions (If Unpainted)

• Sand tonneau cover prior to painting recommend 500 grit using an orbital type sander.
• Prior to painting, clean all surfaces to be painted using clean water and a mild detergent,
do not use lacquer, thinner or any solvent based products. Wipe completely dry.
• Best results will be achieved by wiping the areas to be painted with a tack rag just prior
to painting.
• Select a top coat and clear paint that is suitable for ABS (Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-
Styrene).

Sports Bar

• Please take care when assembling and installing this product to protect the
finish and your investment.
• Regular polishing and waxing is required to protect the finish.
• Finish Protection: Our products have a high finish that must be maintained such
as any other high finish product on the vehicle. Protect the finish with a non
abrasive automotive wax after polishing. Regular polishing of the sportsbar is
required to prevent staining or corrosion of the finish. Use products formulated
for stainless steel. Failure to maintain the finish may cause unrepairable
damage to the sportsbar.

Disclaimer: The buyer assumes all risk and liability whatsoever from the installation
and use of our products. Our products are sold as decorative accessories and should
not be relied upon as protection for the vehicle or occupants in the event of a
collision or rollover. The manufacturer assumes no liability for injury, loss, incidental
or consequential damages in the event of a collision or rollover.

Sports Bar Kit Contents

Cargo Box Cover Package Installation

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3397247&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3397247 Page 4 of 31

PARTS LIST

DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

Sports Bar Tube 1

Sports Bar Right Hand Leg 1

Sports Bar Left Hand Leg 1

Rubber Sleeves 2

M8x30 mm Black Screws Hex Drive 2

M8 Black Internal Tooth Washer 2

LED 1

LED Gasket (attached to LED) 1

Wiring Connector - Male 1

Wiring Adaptor Loom 1

M4x30 mm Screw 2

M4 Internal Tooth Washer 2

Foot Gasket Left Hand Front 1

Foot Gasket Left Hand Rear 1

Foot Gasket Right Hand Front 1

Foot Gasket Right Hand Rear 1

12Gx1½” Self Tapping Screw 4

M6x20 mm Screw 8

M6 Spring Washer 12

Washer Plate 4

Clamping Plate 4

Black Decal 1

Rivet - SS304 4

Hard Tonneau Cover Installation

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3397247&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3397247 Page 5 of 31

1. Thoroughly clean and dry installation area (1).

Note: If vehicle is fitted with an LED brake light at the top of the rear window, proceed to
Step 2. Otherwise proceed to Step 4.
2. Clean the LED brake light area (1) with alcohol wipe provided and wipe away residue with
a dry, clean cloth.
3. Remove protective lining from the black decal (2) and attach to the LED brake light
ensuring the brake light is completely covered.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3397247&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3397247 Page 6 of 31

4. Position and centralise the header plate extrusion (1) on top of the header rail (2).
Note: Measure each end of header plate to vehicle to ensure it is central on the vehicle.

5. Use the header plate as a template and mark the nine hole positions in the vertical surface
of the header plate (1) onto the vehicle, remove the header plate extrusion.
6. Centre punch and drill 5 mm holes followed by 10 mm at the nine marked positions.
7. Remove any swarf and apply rust inhibitor to all drilled holes.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3397247&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3397247 Page 7 of 31

8. The next step is very important, please take the time to ensure that it is done
correctly.
Note: It is recommended that you purchase Holden special tool (HOLHDNSG) hand lever
Heavy Duty Nut-Serter Gun to assist with this process, the tool will both ensure the
nutserts are installed correctly and substantially reduce installation time for this
step.
Use a nutsert installation tool to install the nutserts.
9. Apply non-acetic silicon to the underside of the header plate extrusion (1) around the area
of the front 9 holes, and position centrally on the vehicle.
10. Secure with nine 20 mm allen screws (3) and fibre washers (2).
Tighten
Tighten to Torque 8 N-m.

11. Drive five M6 countersunk self-tapping screws (2) through the holes on the top face of the
header plate extrusion (1).
Tighten
Tighten to Torque 3 N-m.

12. Remove the tie down brackets (1) from both side of the bed using a TORX head
screwdriver.
13. Retain the tie down brackets (1) and four of the TORX head screws (2).

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3397247&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3397247 Page 8 of 31

14. Open the vehicle’s tailgate (3).


15. Remove the two push scrivets (1) on each side of the tailgate opening and peel back the
rubber tailgate seal (2) as far as the base of the tailgate (3).

16. Lift and pull back to remove the bed liner from the vehicle.
17. Use a 45 mm hole saw to drill a hole (1) in the centre of the flat area of the bed liner
above the second rib in from the right on the front face of the bed liner.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3397247&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3397247 Page 9 of 31

18. Feed the hard tonneau cover wiring harness (1) through the hole from inside the bed liner
to the rear surface. Seat the grommet on the hole.

19. Position the harness and plug horizontally directed to the centre of the vehicle. Drill the
fixing holes and use the fixings supplied with the wiring harness to mount the plug to the
bed liner.

20. Pass the two way connector high mount sports bar brake light on the harness over the top
of the bed liner (1) and tape to the inside surface of the bed liner.
21. Tape the harness along the side of the bed liner.
22. Feed the spade terminal (3) from the hard tonneau wiring harness through the tray liner
(1) center tie down bracket opening (2).

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3397247&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3397247 Page 10 of 31

23. Trial fit the water deflector (1) to the under side of the painted header rail (3) with the
water deflector protruding approximately 45 mm out from the header rail. Note tape
attachment areas. Remove the water deflector (1) and clean the header rail (3) in tape
areas as noted, with the alcohol wipe provided and wipe away residue with a dry clean
cloth.
24. Remove five protective tape liners (2) from water deflector (1) and install on the header
rail (3). Apply firm pressure to water deflector over tape areas to ensure maximum
adhesion to the vehicle.
25. Reinstall the bed liner to the vehicle.

26. Locate the white 2-way connectors (1) on the vehicle, directly behind the wheel arch and
unclip them from the vehicle.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3397247&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3397247 Page 11 of 31

27. Connect the white 2-way connectors (2) on the hard tonneau wiring harness to the white 2
–way connectors (1) from the vehicle. Clip one of the white 2 way connectors where they
were unclipped form the vehicle.

28. Locate the earth wire terminal (1) behind the bed liner, near the vehicle’s tailgate and
remove the bolt (2) securing the terminal and add the hard tonneau cover wiring harness
earth terminal. Refit the bolt and tighten to 8 N.m.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3397247&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3397247 Page 12 of 31

29. Remove the terminator block (3) from the 4 way connector (2) rear of the right hand
wheel arch and connect the 4 way hard tonneau harness connector (1) to the vehicle
harness 4 way connector.
30. Re-fit the two push scrivets and re-install the rubber tailgate seal.

31. Cut remaining foam tape (6) in half and remove tape lining. Fit foam tape in-line with
water deflector from outer face of sail plane (4) down to the water deflector as shown.

32. Trial fit the jacking bracket (3) by sliding it into the side rail (1) aligning it with the bed
liner fixture (4).
33. Mark the two outer hole positions (2) on the jacking bracket (3). Remove jacking bracket
from the side rail (1). Repeat process for the other side of the vehicle.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3397247&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3397247 Page 13 of 31

34. Centre punch and drill 5 mm holes at the four previously marked positions (1). Remove
any swarf and apply rust inhibitor to all drilled holes.
Note: Be careful not to drill through the outside rail. Use a 10 mm drill stop.
35. Pre assemble the M8 hex head bolt (2) and M8 hex nuts (3) to the jacking bracket (4).
Note: Do not install the jacking bracket at this time.

36. Clean the top front surface of the header plate extrusion (1) with alcohol wipe provided
and wipe away residue with a clean cloth. Measure and if required cut rubber extrusion (2)
to 960 mm. Measure and mark (3) the centre of the header plate extrusion (1) and rubber
extrusion (2).
37. Remove the protective lining from the rubber extrusion (2). Attach the rubber extrusion
(2) to the header plate extrusion (1) aligning it to the centre marks (3) from the previous
step. Rub down firmly to ensure good adhesion.
Note: Ensure rubber extrusion is aligned centrally on header plate, and the slant in the
rubber extrusion is facing the rear of the vehicle.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3397247&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3397247 Page 14 of 31

38. For both sides of the vehicle trial fit the foam tape (1) between the rubber extrusion (4)
and the sail plane (2) as shown and cut to length.
Note: Ensure foam tape rolls down between the sail plane and the header rail as shown.
39. Remove the protective lining from the foam tapes (1) and attach them to the header plate
extrusion (3), 5 mm away from the hinge rib as shown. Rub down firmly to ensure good
adhesion.

40. Using a TORX head screwdriver, remove and discard the TORX head screws (2) from the
front two holes on the LH and RH side rails (1). Drill out the four holes with a 3/16” drill.
Remove all swarf.
Note: Be careful not to drill through the outside rail. Use a 10 mm drill stop.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3397247&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3397247 Page 15 of 31

41. Slide the clamping plate (1) into the side rail (2) and locate centrally over the top of the
previously drilled holes. Repeat process for other side of the vehicle.

42. Attach LED (5) and LED gasket (6) to the sports bar top tube (1) using the M4x30 mm
screws (4) and M4 internal tooth washers (3).
Tighten
Tighten to Torque 2 N-m.
Note: Ensure the warning label is orientated correctly. If wording is upside down flip bar
180°, ensure LED wiring loom (2) is fed through and comes out the right hand end
of the sports bar top tube.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3397247&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3397247 Page 16 of 31

43. Slide the rubber sleeves (1) over the ends of the sports bar left hand leg (5) and right
hand leg (3) and then slide the sports bar top tube (2) in. Ensure that all holes are
aligned, and the LED wiring loom (4) is fed through the large hole in the bottom of the
sports bar right hand front leg (3).

44. Slide rubber sleeves (2) away from join and temporarily secure sports bar top tube (3) to
sports bar left (1) and right hand legs (4) using two M8x30 black screws (5) and M8 black
internal tooth washers (6).
Tighten
Tighten to Torque 7 N-m.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3397247&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3397247 Page 17 of 31

45. Note the protective lining (2) on back of sports bar foot gaskets (3). Trial fit the gaskets to
the sports bar (1) to determine which foot they are fitted to. Remove the lining (2) before
attaching in next step.

46. Attach the foot gaskets (2) to their correct sports bar feet (1), ensuring the holes in the
sports bar feet (1) remain accessible and the wiring loom (3) is fed through.

47. Fit the corner pieces (1) to the sports bar feet (2). Secure each corner piece with two
M6x30 mm screws (3), M6 Spring washers (4) and M6 large flat washers (5). Leave the
screws loose - do not tighten at this time.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3397247&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3397247 Page 18 of 31

48. Trial fit the sports bar (1) and corners to the vehicle.
49. To protect the vehicle’s paint work, attach a clear protection pad (2) where the corner
piece meets the side rail (3). Repeat process for other side of the vehicle, then remove the
sports bar.

50. Fit the sports bar (1) to the vehicle. Ensure the corner pieces (3) are tightly fitted around
the sail plane panels (2), then tighten the M6 screws (4).
Note: Corner piece must sit on and compress the foam tape (5) as shown to prevent
water entering the vehicle bed area.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3397247&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3397247 Page 19 of 31

51. Clip the male wiring connector (3) into the 2 way connector on the hard tonneau harness
(4) previously tapped to the inside of the bed liner ensuring it is oriented correctly. Match
the wire colors on the sports bar harness (1) with the wire colors on the hard tonneau
harness and push the terminals on the wires into the connector. Ensure the terminals are
correctly oriented. Once the connection has been made, tuck the connector behind the bed
liner.

52. Re-install the front tie down bracket (1) to the vehicle with TORX head screw (2).
Tighten
Tighten to Torque 8 N-m.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3397247&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3397247 Page 20 of 31

53. Re-fit the rubber tailgate seal (2) and re-install the two push scrivets (1).
54. Attach the sports bar front legs (1) to the clamping plates (3) and side rails using one (per
side) 12Gx1½” self tapping screw (6), M6 spring washer (5) and washer plate (4). Do not
tighten at this time. Repeat process for the sports bar rear legs (2).

55. Attach the sports bar front legs (1) to the clamping plates (3) using two (per side) M6x20
mm screws (5) and M6 spring washers (4). Do not tighten at this time. Repeat process for
the sports bar rear legs (2).

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3397247&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3397247 Page 21 of 31

56. Tighten all the screws on the sports bar right hand leg in the order A - B - C - D - E - F.
Repeat process for the sports bar left hand leg. Visually check that all screws are home
and all spring washers are compressed.
Tighten
Tighten A - B – D - E to Torque 12 N-m.Tighten
Tighten C - F to Torque 10 N-m.

57. Attach the jacking bracket (1) to the side rail (2) using the hex head self tapping screws
(3) as shown. Repeat process for the other side of the vehicle.
Tighten
Tighten to Torque 3 N-m.

58. Using the installed screw (2) as a guide mark a centre point on the top and bottom of the
tube at each end as shown. Drill four 5 mm holes and remove any burrs or sharp edges.
Install four rivets (1) as shown.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3397247&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3397247 Page 22 of 31

59. Remove and retain previously installed M8x30 black screws (1) and M8 black internal tooth
washers (2). Slide rubber sleeves (3) back over tube join aligning the holes. Re-install
M8x30 black screws (1) and M8 black internal tooth washers (2).
Tighten
Tighten to Torque 7 N-m.

60. Position the right hand side centre tie down bracket (1) and drill a 3 mm hole (5) in the
tray liner (2) just touching the top of the tie down bracket. Remove the bracket and use
the drill to make a channel from the hole to the tie down opening in the liner.
61. Cable tie the wire 150 mm (4) back from the wire terminal, place the wire in the hole with
the cable tie behind the tray liner and refit the tie down bracket using the ball stud screw
(3). Fit the tie down bracket on the other side of the vehicle using the second ball stud
screw (3).
Tighten
Tighten to Torque 10 N-m.
62. Repeat process for other side of the vehicle.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3397247&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3397247 Page 23 of 31

Note: Ensure the vehicle’s tailgate is OPEN before installing Tonneau Cover, the cover
must not be closed until all adjustments have been carried out and the installation is
complete.
63. Position the striker plate (1) on to the rear tie down bracket (4) and fit the assembly to
the rear tie down mounting position. Ensure the striker plate is parallel with the top of the
vehicle tray (2).
Tighten
Tighten to Torque 10 N-m.
64. Drill a 5 mm hole and rivet (3) the striker to the tray liner (2). Repeat on other side of
vehicle. With the lock striker bracket positioned correctly.

Note: 2 People are required to lift and fit tonneau cover onto the vehicle.
65. Fit tonneau cover (1) and secure with hinge pins (2). Ensure hinge pins “Click” into
position.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3397247&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3397247 Page 24 of 31

66. Check the tonneau cover (1) is sitting square on the vehicle tray by measuring the
tonneau cover overhang at the front and the back of the tonneau cover on both sides.

67. If adjustment is required loosen the tonneau cover hinge bolts (1) and re-positioning
tonneau cover centrally and square to the vehicle tray. Re-tighten hinge screws. Recheck
and adjust until correct fit.
Tighten
Tighten to Torque 5 N-m.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3397247&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3397247 Page 25 of 31

68. Attach gas struts (2) to the tonneau cover, clip the gas strut cylinder to the tonneau cover
and the shaft of the gas strut to the ball stud screw on the centre vehicle tie down bracket.
69. Attach the two wires (1) to the terminals on each end of the gas strut on the right hand
side of the vehicle.

70. Run nuts (3) up to the ends of the threads of the two U-bolts (2) and sit the U-bolts into
the latch brackets (1).

71. Put the tonneau cover latches in the locked position and close the tonneau cover.
72. Inspect locking mechanism alignment with the U-bolts See view ‘A’ no adjustment is
required. If the latches do not align correctly See view ‘B’ and ‘C’ with the U-bolts
adjustment is required. If no adjustments required go to step 78.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3397247&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3397247 Page 26 of 31

73. Loosen the latch retaining bolts (1) and slide the latches along until correctly aligned.
Tighten
Tighten the screws to 4 N-m of torque.

74. Once the latches have been adjusted it will be necessary to re-adjust the latch release
mechanism, Remove inspection cover (2) by removing scrivets (1) and rotating cover
counter clockwise.

75. Release latch control rods from the locking mechanism by releasing the plastic retainer
clips (1) and pulling the rod (2) out of the locking mechanism.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3397247&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3397247 Page 27 of 31

76. Rotate the ends of the control rod to lengthen or reduce the length of the control rods as
required. The control rods should be in the centre of the hole (1) in the latch when
correctly adjusted. Once the adjustment is complete refit the control rod retaining plastic
clips and reconnect the actuator.

77. Refit the inspection cover and scrivets.


78. Release the tonneau cover latches (1) and close them again with the U-bolts (2) engaged
in the latch. Run the nuts down the U-bolts until the nuts are in contact with the striker
plates. Ensure the top of the U-bolts are parallel with the surface of the striker plate. Use
the spring washer and nuts supplied to fix the U-bolts in position.
Tighten
Tighten to Torque 4 N-m.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3397247&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3397247 Page 28 of 31

79. Check alignment and release mechanism operation.


Note: Tonneau cover has 2 stage locks. Ensure tonneau engages with second stage of
latch. For best results, spend time to tune the lock striker position up and down to
provide minimal movement when the tonneau is fully closed with tailgate up in the
closed position.
80. Connect the hard tonneau harness connector (2) to the 4-way connectors (1) located at
the front of the tub.

81. Adjust the tonneau cover interior light electrical connector on the right hand side gas strut.
Loosen the screw (2) on the driver’s side gas strut terminal housing (1), until it moves up
and down the strut freely. Open the tonneau cover and slide the electrical connector
housing up the strut, gently close the tonneau cover.
82. Inspect the driver’s side gas strut and ensure the terminal housing (1) has come into
contact with the gas strut’s cylinder (3) and that the interior light has gone off. Open
tonneau cover and tighten screw (2) on terminal housing (1). Check the operation several
times to ensure correct operation. Ensure light operation is checked periodically and
whenever the tonneau is removed and reinstalled.
83. Manually lock and unlock the tonneau cover using the key supplied (tonneau cover is
supplied in the unlocked position). Check operation of the central unlocking mechanism by
pressing the lock and unlock on your vehicle’s key. Review operation through the
inspection cover. Test operation of lock mechanism by pressing tonneau’s push button
after you have pressed “Lock” on the vehicle’s key, and then again after you have pressed
“Unlock” on the vehicle’s key.

Removal Of Tonneau Cover

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3397247&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3397247 Page 29 of 31

Note: Two people are required to lift and remove the tonneau cover from the vehicle.
1. Disconnect wiring harness (3) at the front of the tray and disconnect the lower terminal (2)
from the right hand side gas strut. Detach both gas struts (5) from the vehicle tray by
inserting a small screwdriver and releasing the spring clip pressure (4) on the gas strut (5).
Note: Do not remove the spring clip (4). Only a small amount of levering is required to
detach.

2. Remove hinge pins (1) and remove tonneau cover (2).

Replacement Of Tonneau Cover

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3397247&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3397247 Page 30 of 31

Note: Two people are required to lift and fit the tonneau cover onto the vehicle.
1. Fit tonneau cover (1) and secure with hinge pins (2). Ensure hinge pins “Click” into
position.

2. Attach gas struts (2) by clipping into place. Ensure narrow end mounts to the vehicle.
Connect wiring harness (3) / (1) to both terminals of driver’s side gas struts.
3. Connect the 4-way connectors (4) to the connector in the front of the vehicle tray.
4. Recheck latch alignment.
5. Check the interior light function and adjust if required.
Note: Incorrect interior light operation can flatten the vehicle battery.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3397247&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3397247 Page 31 of 31

6. Write down the key identification code and provide to the owner of the vehicle for future
reference.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3397247&cellId=18857... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3292270 Page 1 of 10

2014 Holden VF Sedan| VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Structural Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 3292270

Front End Guard Package Installation


Installation Instructions Part Number

92262305

Tools Required

• Phillips Head Screwdriver


• Trim Release Tool
• 10mm, 13mm and 16mm Socket
• Ratchet
• T20 Torx Bit
• 14mm Hole Saw
• Air Saw
• Hack Saw
• Knife
• Masking Tape
• Ruler

Fitting Instructions

Important:
◦ Fit slim line license plate.
◦ Do not attach the Roo Bar to the vehicle using anchorages not intended for
this purpose.
◦ Do not use this product for any vehicle make or model, other than those
specified by the Roo Bar manufacturer.
◦ Do not remove the plaque or label from the Roo Bar.
◦ Do not modify the structure of the Roo Bar in any way.
1. Raise and secure the vehicle off the ground and remove the front wheels.
2. Remove the front wheel arch liner. Remove the 11 screws (1) fixing the liner to the vehicle
and remove the 4 scrivets (2) then remove the wheel liner (3) (both sides of the vehicle).
© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3292270&cellId=22305... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3292270 Page 2 of 10

3. Disconnect the fascia harness (1) from the vehicle harness (2).

4. From under the vehicle, remove the 4 short fascia nappy bolts (1) and the 2 front long
fascia support bolts (2).

5. From under the vehicle bonnet, remove the 6 bolts (3) across the rear edge of the front
fascia cover and the 6 screws (2) across the front of the front cover and remove the cover
(1).

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3292270&cellId=22305... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3292270 Page 3 of 10

6. Remove the 2 scrivets (3) retaining the fascia to the front cross member. Carefully pull the
fascia outwards to release the fascia from the fender retaining clips (1), then carefully pull
the fascia forwards to release the fascia retaining clips (2) under the headlamps. Remove
the vehicle fascia.

7. Remove the M4 bolt (1) inboard of the vehicle longitudinal on both sides of the vehicle and
discard.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3292270&cellId=22305... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3292270 Page 4 of 10

Caution: Use the correct fastener in the correct location. Replacement fasteners must be
the correct part number for that application. Fasteners requiring replacement or
fasteners requiring the use of thread locking compound or sealant are identified in
the service procedure. Do not use paints, lubricants, or corrosion inhibitors on
fasteners or fastener joint surfaces unless specified. These coatings affect
fastener torque and joint clamping force and may damage the fastener. Use the
correct tightening sequence and specifications when installing fasteners in order
to avoid damage to parts and systems.
8. Remove the 6 impact beam fixing bolts (1), (2) (three on each side), slide the roo bar
mounting brackets (3) onto the impact beam. Fit the 2 outer bolts (1) to each of the
mounting brackets but do not tighten at this time.
Important: Test fit the roo bar and ensure the roo bar is centered to the vehicle by
measuring the clearances between the end of the roo bar to a point on the
vehicle headlamp. When centered, ensure the vehicle impact beam is centered
by measuring from the ends of the impact beam and the outer edge of the roo
bar mounting brackets. When all parts are centered tighten the two outer
impact beam fixing bolts. Remove the roo bar. Reinstall the remaining impact
beam fixing bolts.
Tighten
Tighten all impact beam bolts to 22±3 N.m of torque.

9. Unclip the impact absorber from the fascia and trim off 110 mm from each end (1) and refit
to fascia.

10. Print out the template at the end of these instructions and check the scale. Carefully cut out
template (1) and position the template as indicated.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3292270&cellId=22305... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3292270 Page 5 of 10

Caution: Always check scale, size and position of all templates before drilling. Failing to do
so may cause damage to the vehicle, misalignment of components or the inability
to install the accessory.
11. Mark the hole centers on the vehicle fascia and use a step drill to make the 14 mm holes.
12. Use a reciprocating saw to carefully cut between the 14 mm holes. Ensure the hole edge is
clean and tidy.

13. Remove the 2 scrivets (1) and the M4 bolt (2) holding the air blocker (3) beside the inboard
end of the left hand side headlamp.

14. Disconnect the headlamp harness connector (1) and connect the roo bar breakout harness
(2) between the connectors.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3292270&cellId=22305... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3292270 Page 6 of 10

15. Pass the roo bar harness (4) between the front cross brace and the side of the headlamp.
16. Make a 20 mm hole (2) in the side of the air blocker and clip (3) the roo bar harness to the
air blocker and refit the air blocker (1) to the vehicle. Clip the roo bar harness to the side of
the radiator shroud (6). Repeat on the other side of the vehicle. There is no air blocker on
the right hand side of the vehcle, the clip is attached to the lower headlamp attachment
bracket (5).

17. Reinstall the fascia to the vehicle and pass the harnesses (1) through the roo bar mounting
holes.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3292270&cellId=22305... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3292270 Page 7 of 10

18. Fit the roo bar (1) to the vehicle. From the top, fit the roo bar retaining bolts (2) and
tighten to 58±9 N.m of torque. Fit the Nylock nut (3) on the bottom end of the roo bar
retaining bolt and tighten to 20±3 N.m of torque.

19. Loosely fit the stud clip cable ties (1) to the two breakout harnesses.

20. Connect the breakout harnesses connector (2) to the roo bar harnesses connector (1) and
fit the stud clip cable ties (4) to the studs (3) on the top of the roo bar fixing bolts. Tighten
the cable ties and remove the excess tie length.
21. Once the installation has been carried out, reprogram the APA Module using TIS2WEB SPS.
22. Check the roo bar lights for correct operation.
23. Refit all parts removed.
24. Fit a slim line number plate to the roo bar.

Front End Guard Package Installation

PARTS LIST

DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

Part Number: 92262304

Roo Bar Assembly 1

Bracket Left 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3292270&cellId=22305... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3292270 Page 8 of 10

PARTS LIST

Bracket Right 1

Bolt M10x65 2

Washer M10 2

Nut M10 Nylock 2

Breakout Harness - Left 1

Breakout Harness - Right 1

Stud Clip 2

Instructions 1

Templates

1. Select the appropriate template to be printed.


Note: This then brings up the cutting template on its own.
2. Click on the magnifying glass in the procedure under the selected cutting template for a
detailed picture of the image.
Note: No other printing method is acceptable as they change the scale.
3. Click on the printer icon above the image next to the 1:1 in order to print in the correct
scale.
4. Use a copy machine to resize the template to ensure the vertical and horizontal axis on the
scale measure 50mm.
5. Cut out template.
Caution: Always check scale, size and position of all templates before drilling. Failing to do
so may cause damage to the vehicle, misalignment of components or the inability
to install the accessory.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3292270&cellId=22305... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3292270 Page 9 of 10

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3292270&cellId=22305... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3292270 Page 10 of 10

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3292270&cellId=22305... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2221490 Page 1 of 7

2014 Holden VF Sedan| VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Structural Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 2221490

Ladder Rack Package Installation

TOOLS REQUIRED:

Phillips head screwdriver, T45 Torx bit, 13mm spanner, 12mm Socket, Rachet, 25mm Hole saw,
3mm Drill bit and Power drill.

Note: All packaging is to be removed from all parts of the accessory prior to installing the parts to
the vehicle.

FITTING INSTRUCTIONS:

1. Use a drill to remove the warning label (1) from the Rear LHS of the tub liner and relocate
onto the side access cover below using the rivets (2) supplied. Refer to figure 1.

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2221490&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2221490 Page 2 of 7

2. Rear Ladder Bar: Remove the torx bolts (1) from the two rear tie down brackets and
discard the bolts, remove the brackets (2). Refer to figure 2.

3. Refer to figure 3 for the following:


3.1. Select the appropriate template to be printed.
Note: This then brings up the cutting template on its own.
3.2. Click on the magnifying glass in the procedure under the selected cutting template for
a detailed picture of the image.
Note: No other printing method is acceptable as they change the scale.
3.3. Click on the printer icon above the image next to the 1:1 in order to print in the
correct scale.
3.4. Use a copy machine to resize the template to ensure the vertical and horizontal axis
on the scale measure 50mm.
Caution: Always check scale, size and position of all templates before drilling. Failing
to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, misalignment of components or
the inability to install the accessory.
3.5. Check the scale on the template (1) and cut the template out, position the template
as indicated on the template and mark the hole position (2) on the tub liner. Remove
the template and drill the holes using a 25mm hole saw.
3.6. Remove the hex head bolts behind the tub liner at the hole positions and discard.
3.7. Refit the tie down bracket.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2221490&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2221490 Page 3 of 7

4. Refer to figure 4 for the following:


4.1. Fit the adhesive pads (1) to the bottom of the ladder rack uprights.
4.2. Slide the top bar (2) into the two side assemblies (3) and use the bolts (4) and spring
washers to loosely hold the assembly together.

5. Slide short plastic strip into slot, slide plate with threaded hole (1) into the slots in the ends
of the front ladder bar (2), fit the mounting brackets (3) washer (4) and retaining nuts (5).
Tighten to specified torque and slide long plastic strip into slot. Refer to figure 5.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2221490&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2221490 Page 4 of 7

6. Push the front ladder rack bar end caps (1) onto the bar. Refer to figure 6.

7. Refer to figure 7 for the following:


7.1. Position the ladder rack on the rear of the vehicle and align the fixing points (1) with
the tie down fixing bolt holes. Use the short bolts (2) supplied at the tie down points
and the long bolts (3) through the front ladder rack (4) fixing holes. Tighten to the
specified torque.
7.2. Once the ladder rack is tightened, tighten the ladder rack joining bolts to the specified
torque (Refer to figure 4.).
7.3. Front Ladder Bar: Position the “T” bolts (5) over the opening (one each end of the
Sports Bar). Push down on the “T” to compress the seal strip and slide the “T” along
the channel (two “T” bolts are used at each end).
7.4. Fit the ladder rack on to the “T” bolts and centre the bar on the sports bar.
7.5. Fit the nuts (6), spring washers (7) and washers (8) to the “T” bolts to fix the bar in
position. Tighten to specified torque. Trim and fit the rubber wind strip into the
channel in the sports bar.

8. To fit accessories to the ladder rack open the hinged end cap, remove the seal strip and
slide the accessory into the channel and follow the instruction for the accessory being
fitted. Trim the seal strip as required to accommodate the accessory. When finished close
the end cap. Refer to figure 8.
9. Place the fitting instructions in the glovebox of the vehicle

Ladder Rack Package Installation

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2221490&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2221490 Page 5 of 7

PARTS LIST

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

92184622 UTE LADDER RACK PACKAGE 1

NS FRONT LADDER RACK SPACER KIT 1

NS SPACER, LADDER RACK 2

NS CROSS BEAM, LADDER RACK 1

NS END CAP 2

SP REAR LADDER RACK 1

NS UPRIGHT, LADDER RACK RH 1

NS UPRIGHT, LADDER RACK LH 1

NS CROSS BEAM, LADDER RACK 1

NS ADHESIVE PAD 2

NS SMALL PARTS KIT 1

92237830 FITTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

FD796 PROOF OF WARRANTY CARD 1

NS - Not serviced SP - Serviced Part

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2221490&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2221490 Page 6 of 7

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2221490&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2221490 Page 7 of 7

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2221490&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2216373 Page 1 of 8

2014 Holden VF Sedan| VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Structural Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 2216373

Luggage Carrier Attachment Package Installation


Luggage Carrier Attachment Package Installation

PARTS LIST

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

92174445 ROOF BAR KIT (SEDAN) 1

ROOF BAR – FRONT 1

ROOF BAR – REAR 1

KEYS 2

92225255 FITTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

ROOF RACK & DITCH MOULDING KIT


92235722 1
(UTILITY)

ROOF BAR 1

DITCH MOULDING 2

92225255 FITTING INSTRUCTION 1

MANDATORY FIT FOR LWB, AVAILABLE SEPARATELY:

92196502 LWB DITCH MOULDING KIT

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

92207466 ROOF BAR KIT (WAGON) 1

ROOF BAR – FRONT 1

ROOF BAR – REAR 1

KEYS 2

92225255 FITTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

RELATED ACCESSORIES AVAILABLE SEPARATELY:

BIKE CARRIER

SKI CARRIER (SCISSOR TYPE)

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2216373&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2216373 Page 2 of 8

PARTS LIST

SKI CARRIER (UNIVERSAL TYPE)

ROOF TRAY

TOOLS REQUIRED:

• Small Flat Bladed Screwdriver


• Caulking Gun and Sealant

Important:

• The roof bars must not be fitted to a vehicle when the ditch moulding has been
removed.
• If you experience difficulty when installations of the roof bars, consult your GM
Holden Dealer.
◦ It is important to correctly follow the instructions for fitting and use.
◦ Periodically check that the roof bars are securely attached to the vehicle.
◦ Do not exceed the maximum permitted roof load and the maximum load of the
roof bars (75 kg INCLUDING ROOF BARS).
◦ Evenly distribute the load on the roof bars.
◦ Keep the load and its center of gravity as low as practicable.
◦ Heavy loads should be carried near the feet of the roof bars.
◦ Be aware of the statutory requirements regarding maximum permissible
projections from the vehicle.
◦ Loads must be secured correctly and safely.
◦ Equipment must be maintained in good working order.
– Use straps or ropes to secure the load. Do not use elastic cords. Periodically
check the tension of the bindings.
– Stack wide items to minimize the lifting effect.
– Secure long loads at the front and rear of the vehicle.
– Where specialized carrying accessories are available it is recommended they
be used.
– The behavior and response of the vehicle will be influenced when roof bars
are fitted and a load is being carried. Adjust driving to suit the load carried
and the current driving conditions.
– Remove the roof bars when putting vehicle through automatic car wash.
– To reduce fuel consumption, it is recommended that the roof bars be
removed after use.

FITTING INSTRUCTIONS:

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2216373&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2216373 Page 3 of 8

1. Remove the ditch mould (1) from the vehicle by lifting from the front of the vehicle and
working back releasing the ditch moulding clips as you go. When all clips are released,
remove the ditch moulding.

2. Inspect the area where the roof bars are fitted. If there is excessive body sealant (refer to
section AA of figure 2), remove the ditch mouldings and use a screw driver to remove the
sealant from the area as shown. Repeat for all four roof bar mounting points.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2216373&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2216373 Page 4 of 8

3. When the excess sealant has been removed apply Terolan-light (Henkel Product) or
Polyurethane Beta Seal (Dow Chemical Product) to exposed joint as indicated. Allow the
sealant.

4. Refer to Figure 4 for the following:


4.1. Once the rework is complete refit the ditch moulding.
4.2. Position the notch (1) on the front end of the ditch moulding with the gap (2) in the
seam of the roof join. Push down on the front of the ditch moulding and along the
length of the ditch moulding.
Note: (LWB Vehicles only:) fit the replacement ditch moulding to the vehicle.

IMPORTANT: To prevent wind noise, ensure the wind sealing strip (1) is installed.
When installing accessories press the wind sealing strip down and slide
the fixing into the channel (2) over the top of the wind seal strip.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2216373&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2216373 Page 5 of 8

5. Use a small flat bladed screwdriver (1) to lever up the roof bar mounting point covers (2),
remove all four covers.

6. Rotate the Holden logo key cover (1) to expose the key barrel.

7. Setting up the roof bars for fitting to the vehicle:


7.1. Use the roof bar key to unlock the end cover (3). Open the cover, return the key to
the locked position so that the key can be removed and lower the cover down flat.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2216373&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2216373 Page 6 of 8

7.2. Slide the roof mount cover (4) into the end of the roof bar (1).
8. Refer to the diagram (2) on the inside face of the roof bar cover, fit the roof bar at the
location indicated by the diagram, ensure the front of the vehicle in the diagram is facing
the front of your vehicle when the roof bar is installed.

9. Raise the end cover (1) up over the top of the roof bar.
10. Fully raise the RED lockout lever (2).

Important: For short wheel base (SWB) vehicles with a factory fitted sunroof, the rubber
pad (2) on the foot of the REAR roof bar only must be removed to allow the
locking mechanism to operate.
11. Raise the metal lockout lever (1).
12. Sliding the thumb grips (3) together will put the roof bar locking pins in the unlocked
position ready for fitting to the vehicle.
13. Repeat on all roof bar ends fixings.
14. Insert one end of each of the bars into the mounting point, apply sufficient pressure to the
other end of the bar to seat the bar.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2216373&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2216373 Page 7 of 8

Note: If difficulties are encountered during this step, see your GM Holden Dealer.
15. To lock the roof bars onto the vehicle, slide both the locking pin plate thumb grips (1) out
to their full extension. Lower the lockout plate (5) down and under the locking pin plates
(2). The claw (4) of the lockout plate must be tucked under both locking pin plates (2)

16. Hold the claw of the locking plate (2) in position under the locking pin plates and rotate the
lockout lever (1) down to the lock the roof bar to the vehicle.

17. To close the end covers:

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2216373&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2216373 Page 8 of 8

17.1. Insert the key and turn the lock to the open position.
17.2. Place the bottom of the end cover (1) against the roof bar mount to engage the
lower locating pins (2), rotate the top of the cover to the closed position.
17.3. Rotate the key to the locked position and remove the key. Rotate the Holden logo to
cover the key barrel.
NOTE: If difficulties are experienced in locking the cover into position return to step
11 to ensure the bar is secured to the vehicle properly.
17.4. Repeat on all roof bar ends fixings.
17.5. To check final installation, hold the roof bar near each leg then apply pressure in fore
and aft directions to ensure no movement is present in the roof bar. If movement is
present contact your dealer.
18. To remove the roof bar repeat the instructions in reverse order.

19. Fit the roof mount covers (1) with the arrow on the top face pointing forward.
20. Make a note of the key number on these instructions to refer to should the keys be
mislaid.
Key Number:
21. Place the keys and the fitting instructions in the glove box of the vehicle.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2216373&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2224205 Page 1 of 2

2014 Holden VF Sedan| VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Structural Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 2224205

Ski Carrier Package Installation


FITTING INSTRUCTIONS: Universal Ski Carrier Fitting Procedure.

1. The Universal Ski Carrier is fitted to the roof bars to support skis during transportation and
prevent damage to the roof bars.

2. Refer to Figure 1 for the following:


2.1. Wrap the Universal Ski Carrier around the roof bar inserting the straps through the
holes on the opposite side of the universal ski carrier and pull firmly until all slack has
been pulled through. Ensure a tight fit to keep the moulding upright. Repeat for other
bar.
2.2. Place skis between the support arms. Secure the skis by engaging the securing handle
over the support arm.

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2224205&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2224205 Page 2 of 2

3. Install skis with the front tips to the rear of the vehicle. Refer to figure 2.
NOTE: Remember, the roof bars and universal ski carrier increases the overall height of
your vehicle. Use utmost caution when driving through underpasses, passages and
garage entrances. Remove universal ski carrier and cross bars when putting vehicle
through automatic car wash. Exercise extreme caution when transporting wind
resistant loads, especially when turning and braking.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2224205&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2630151 Page 1 of 9

2014 Holden VF Sedan| VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Structural Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 2630151

Trailer Hitch Draw Bar Package Installation (VE Petrol


and WM / WN LPG and Petrol Caprice 1600 / 2100 Kg
Inst: 92252551)

TOOLS REQUIRED:

Phillips head screwdriver, Small flat bladed screwdriver, Trim release tool, Knife, 18mm Spanner,
10mm Socket, 15mm Socket, 18mm Socket, Ratchet, Power Drill 10mm Drill bit, Extension bar and
torque wrench.

Important: Additional Mandatory equipment is required for all towbars, refer to vehicle owner’s
handbook for details.

Fitting Instructions:

1. Open the rear luggage compartment and remove the spare wheel cover.

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2630151&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2630151 Page 2 of 9

Note: If the vehicle is fitted with Reverse Park Assist (RPA) follow steps 2-4.
2. Use a trim release tool to remove the fir tree clips (2 each end) in the ends of the rear trim
panel. Remove the rear trim panel by pulling upwards and place to one side. Refer to
Figure 1.

3. Refer to Figure 2 for the following: Use a trim release tool to remove the fir tree clips (1) (2
places) and the carpet tongue (2) from the body recess holding the LHS compartment trim
to the side of the vehicle. Pull trim out of the way.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2630151&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2630151 Page 3 of 9

4. Disconnect the RPA connector (1) and push the connector out through the grommet hole
(2). Refer to Figure 3.
NOTE: OEM RPS connector shown. For accessory Reverse Park Assist System disconnect
the sensors from the RPS harness underneath the rear bumper.

5. Remove the scrivets (1) (2 places) and screw (2) retaining the bumper fascia from inside
the rear wheel arch. Repeat on other sides of the vehicle. Refer to Figure 4.

6. Refer to Figure 5 for the following:


6.1. Remove the scrivets (1) (3 places) across the lower edge of the fascia.
6.2. Pull out the sides of the bumper fascia to release the fascia from the body retaining
clip and remove the fascia from the vehicle.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2630151&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2630151 Page 4 of 9

7. Remove the impact absorber (1) from the vehicle and discard. Refer to Figure 6.

8. From inside the luggage compartment, remove the foil/butyl tape (1) covering the tow bar
fixing holes. Ensure all residue is removed.

9. Refer to Figure 8 for the following:


Caution: Use the correct fastener in the correct location. Replacement fasteners
must be the correct part number for that application. Fasteners requiring
replacement or fasteners requiring the use of thread locking compound or

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2630151&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2630151 Page 5 of 9

sealant are identified in the service procedure. Do not use paints,


lubricants, or corrosion inhibitors on fasteners or fastener joint surfaces
unless specified. These coatings affect fastener torque and joint clamping
force and may damage the fastener. Use the correct tightening sequence
and specifications when installing fasteners in order to avoid damage to
parts and systems.
9.1. Fit the towbar assembly (1) into the vehicle longitudinal rails. Align the bracket holes
to match the existing bumper mounting holes in the luggage compartment.
Note: The reinforcing plate (4) for LPG towbars are rectangular in shape.
Tighten
Tighten the fixing bolts (3) to 58 Y (42 lb ft).
Important:
Tighten the towbar fixings to the specific torque.
All fasteners supplied with the towbar kit are critical specification parts.
In the event of damage or loss of these parts, a replacement small parts
kit should be ordered.

10. Drill a 10mm hole in all corners of the opening marked in the fascia. Use a sharp knife to
carefully cut out the opening. Refer to Figure 9.

11. Refer to figure 10 for the following:


Important: If fitting the superlift shock absorber kit, it is recommended that the air valve
mounting point be prepared whilst the fascia is removed from the vehicle.
Refer to superlift shock absorber kit fitting instructions.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2630151&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2630151 Page 6 of 9

Note: Your genuine HSPO towbar is supplied with a trailer wiring harness fixing bracket (1)
that is positioned behind the rear bumper fascia (2). The trailer harness is available
separately from HSPO. Refer to (trailer harness fitting instructions) to fit this part.

12. Refer to Figure 11 for the following: For vehicles fitted with RPA, pass the RPA harness (1)
back through the grommet hole (2) prior to refitting the fascia.
13. Refit the fascia to the vehicle.
14. Ensure the RPA harness grommet is reseated correctly, reconnect the RPA harness and
refit all parts removed from the luggage compartment in reverse order.
Note: If a towbar escutcheon has been purchased it should be fitted prior to installation of
the towbar tongue.

15. Refer to figure 12 for the following:


15.1. Fit the towbar tongue (1) to the towbar and fix in place with the locking pin (2). Use
the retaining clip (3) to secure the locking pin.
15.2. Fit the “D” shackles (4) (2 places) supplied to the towbar fixing points.
Note:
15.3. When not towing, loosen the lock nut (5), tighten the anti-rattle bolt (6) against the
towbar tongue and retighten the lock nut against the towbar.
15.4. The M10 nut and anti-rattle bolt must be removed when the towbar is in use.
15.5. Towbar tongue is ADR compliant only when oriented as shown.
15.6. The “D” shackles may rattle if left on the vehicle when not in use.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2630151&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2630151 Page 7 of 9

Important: Open the drivers door, Clean and stick the ADR compliance label (1) to the drivers “B”
pillar. Refer to figure 13.

Place the fitting instructions in the glove box of the vehicle.

Trailer Hitch Draw Bar Package Installation

PARTS LIST

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

TOWBAR KIT 1600 / 2100 KG (WM / WN


92254089 1
Petrol)

TOWBAR CROSSBEAM WELDED ASM. (INCL


1
LABEL)

TOWBAR TONGUE PKG. 1

TOWBAR TONGUE ASM. 1

TOWBAR TONGUE PIN & RETAINER CLIP ASM. 1

TOWBAR SMALL PARTS KIT 1

“D” SHACKLE KIT 2

BOLT M10x105 4

BOOT PLATE 2

ADR COMPLIANCE LABEL 1

TRAILER WIRING HARNESS BRACKET 1

BOLT M10x1.5 (ANTI RATTLE) 1

NUT M10x1.5 (ANTI RATTLE) 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2630151&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2630151 Page 8 of 9

PARTS LIST

92252551 FITTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

92242488 TOWBAR KIT 1600 / 2100 KG (WN LPG) 1

TOWBAR CROSSBEAM WELDED ASM. (INCL


1
LABEL)

TOWBAR TONGUE PKG. 1

TOWBAR TONGUE ASM. 1

TOWBAR TONGUE PIN & RETAINER CLIP ASM. 1

TOWBAR SMALL PARTS KIT 1

“D” SHACKLE KIT 2

BOLT M10x105 4

BOOT PLATE 2

ADR COMPLIANCE LABEL 1

TRAILER WIRING HARNESS BRACKET 1

BOLT M10x1.5 (ANTI RATTLE) 1

NUT M10x1.5 (ANTI RATTLE) 1

92252551 FITTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

92252547
TOWBAR KIT 1600 / 2100 KG (VE Petrol) 1
92457045

TOWBAR CROSSBEAM WELDED ASM. (INCL


1
LABEL)

TOWBAR TONGUE PKG. 1

TOWBAR TONGUE ASM. 1

TOWBAR TONGUE PIN & RETAINER CLIP ASM. 1

TOWBAR SMALL PARTS KIT 1

“D” SHACKLE KIT 2

BOLT M10x105 4

BOOT PLATE 2

ADR COMPLIANCE LABEL 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2630151&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2630151 Page 9 of 9

PARTS LIST

TRAILER WIRING HARNESS BRACKET 1

BOLT M10x1.5 (ANTI RATTLE) 1

NUT M10x1.5 (ANTI RATTLE) 1

92252551 FITTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

MANDATORY FIT FOR SOME APPLICATIONS (REFER TO OWNER’S HANDBOOK, (SOLD


SEPARATELY)

TRAILER HARNESS

ADDITIONAL TOW BAR ACCESSORIES (SOLD SEPARATELY)

LOAD DISTRIBUTION HITCH

SUPERLIFT SHOCK ABSORBER KIT - (SWB)

SUPERLIFT SHOCK ABSORBER KIT - (LWB)

TOWBALL

TOWBALL COVER

TOWBAR ESCUTCHEON (WM / WN Only)

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2630151&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2630155 Page 1 of 6

2014 Holden VF Sedan| VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Structural Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 2630155

Trailer Hitch Draw Bar Package Installation (Ute Towbar


Kit 1600 Kg Inst: 92253216)

TOOLS REQUIRED:

Phillips head screwdriver, Flat bladed screwdriver, T30 Torx bit, Side cutters, 18mm Socket, 13mm
Socket, Rachet, 8mm Spanner, 18m Spanner, 4mm Drill bit, Power drill and Cutting blade.

FITTING INSTRUCTIONS:

1. Empty the vehicle tray.


2. Remove the fixings retaining the rear fascia from the wheel arch and the scrivets from
along the under side of the fascia.
3. Pull the fascia out from the side of the vehicle to release the fascia from the retaining clips
and remove the fascia.

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2630155&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2630155 Page 2 of 6

4. Refer to Figure 1 for the following:


4.1. Remove the lower tailgate hinge retaining bolts (1) and discard.
4.2. Cut the upright body harness cable tie (2) outboard of the tailgate hinge and lower the
harness away from the tailgate hinge.
4.3. Remove the bolts and the scrivets fixing the rear of the tub liner to the tailgate
opening.
4.4. Release the four rear exhaust hangers and allow the exhaust to hang.

5. Refer to Figure 2 for the following:


5.1. Use a Torx bit to remove the tray tie down points (1) (3 places each side).
5.2. Raise the tub liner to gain sufficient room to fit the towbar.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2630155&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2630155 Page 3 of 6

6. Refer to Figure 3 for the following:


6.1. Clean the area (1) that will be covered by the towbar top plates (2).
6.2. Pass a screwdriver from up under the vehicle through the existing hole in the
longitudinal into the floor of the vehicle tray.
6.3. Slip the crush tube (3) over the screwdriver into the longitudinal, align the top plate
with the vehicle tray and slide onto the screwdriver.
6.4. Take the towbar fixing bolts (4) and push the screwdriver out of the hole. Repeat on
all four crush tube fixings.

7. Position the shim (1) over the forward most towbar holes one each side and position the
towbar (2) on the vehicle and fit the washers, spring washers and nuts to the fixing bolts
(3). Refer to Figure 4.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2630155&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2630155 Page 4 of 6

8. Refer to Figure 5 for the following:


8.1. Fit the replacement bolts (1), spring washer and flat washers (1) through the towbar
brackets (2) into the lower tailgate fixing holes. Run the bolts up to ensure the
towbar is against the tailgate hinge but do not tighten at this time.
8.2. Ensure the body harness is clear of the towbar mounting bracket.
8.3. Tighten the lower tailgate bolts to the specified torque.
8.4. Tighten the four bolts coming through the crush tube to the specified torque.
8.5. Refit the exhaust mountings.

9. Refer to Figure 6 for the following:


9.1. Use a blade to cut around the witness mark (1) on the rear fascia to make the opening
for the towbar receiver tube.
NOTE: If a trailer harness (2) is being installed:
a. Check the scale on the template found on the last page of “Trailer Harness “
instructions and cut the template out.
b. Position the template on the fascia as indicated by the template and drill the 4
mm trailer harness mounting holes.
c. Fit the outer part of the trailer harness to the vehicle before refitting the fascia.
9.2. Refit the rear fascia to the vehicle.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2630155&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2630155 Page 5 of 6

10. Refer to Figure 7 for the following:


10.1. Fit the towbar tongue (1) to the towbar and fix in place with the locking pin (2). Use
the retaining clip (3) to secure the locking pin.
10.2. Fit the “D” shackles (4) (2 places) supplied to the towbar fixing points.
NOTE: When not towing, loosen the lock nut (5), tighten the anti-rattle bolt (6)
against the tow bar tongue and retighten the lock nut against the towbar. The
M10 nut and anti-rattle bolt must be removed when the towbar is in use. Tow
bar tongue is ADR compliant only when orientated as shown. The ‘D’ shackles
may rattle if left on the vehicle when not in use.

11. Open the drivers door, Clean and stick the ADR compliance label (1) to the drivers “B”
pillar. Refer to Figure 8.
12. Place the fitting instructions in the glove box of the vehicle.

Trailer Hitch Draw Bar Package Installation

PARTS LIST

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

92457042 Towbar Kit 1,600 kg Ute 1

Towbar Crossbeam & tongue mount ASM. 1


(Incl plate)

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2630155&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2630155 Page 6 of 6

PARTS LIST

Towbar - Small Parts Kit 1

Bolt M10x1.5x120 GR8.8 Z/P Coach Head 4

Top Plate RH 1

Top Plate LH 1

Spacer Tube 4

Packer 2

Washer Flat M10x25.4x3 4

Washer Spring M10x3.5x2.2 4

Nut M10x1.5 Z/P Hex 5

Bolt M10x1.5x25 Z/P Hex Head 1

Bolt M8x1.25x30 Z/P Hex Head 2

Washer Spring M8x3.0x2.0 Z/P 2

Washer Flat M8x25x3.0 Z/P 2

Trailer harness bracket 1

“D” Shackle Tow bar 2

Towbar Tongue Kit 1

Towbar Tongue 1

Pin & Clip Tow Bar 1

ADR Compliance Label 1

92253216 Fitting Instructions 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2630155&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3321246 Page 1 of 10

2014 Holden VF Sedan| VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Structural Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 3321246

Trailer Hitch Draw Bar Package Installation (VF Evoke


3.0 Litre Petrol Sedan Only. 1600 Kg Inst: 92295934)

TOOLS REQUIRED:

Phillips head screwdriver, Small flat bladed screwdriver, Trim release tool, Knife, 18mm Spanner,
10mm Socket, 15mm Socket, 18mm Socket, Ratchet, Power Drill 10mm Drill bit, Extension bar and
torque wrench.

Important:

• It is necessary to remove the two air blocker’s from the front grill before the vehicle
can tow up to the maximum allowed weight of 1600kg. (With the air blocker’s in place
the vehicle is restricted to 1200kg).
• Additional mandatory equipment is required for all towbars, refer to vehicle owner's
handbook for details.

Fitting Instructions:

1. Open the rear luggage compartment and remove the spare wheel cover.
2. Remove the scrivets (1) (2 places) and screw (2) retaining the bumper fascia from inside the
rear wheel arch. Repeat on other sides of the vehicle.

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3321246&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3321246 Page 2 of 10

3. Remove the scrivets (1) (3 places) across the lower edge of the fascia.
4. Pull out the sides of the bumper fascia to release the fascia from the body retaining clip and
remove the fascia from the vehicle.

5. On the Left hand side of the vehicle, disconnect the rear fascia harness (1) and remove the
rear fascia.

6. Remove the impact absorber (1) from the vehicle and discard.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3321246&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3321246 Page 3 of 10

7. From inside the luggage compartment, remove the foil/butyl tape (1) covering the tow bar
fixing holes. Ensure all residue is removed.

Caution: Use the correct fastener in the correct location. Replacement fasteners must be
the correct part number for that application. Fasteners requiring replacement or
fasteners requiring the use of thread locking compound or sealant are identified in
the service procedure. Do not use paints, lubricants, or corrosion inhibitors on
fasteners or fastener joint surfaces unless specified. These coatings affect
fastener torque and joint clamping force and may damage the fastener. Use the
correct tightening sequence and specifications when installing fasteners in order
to avoid damage to parts and systems.
8. Fit the towbar assembly (1) into the vehicle longitudinal rails. Align the bracket holes to
match the existing bumper mounting holes in the luggage compartment.
9. Place the floor reinforcing plates (2) supplied over the mounting holes and fit the fixing bolts
(3) (4 places).
Tighten
Tighten the fixing bolts (3) to 58 Y (42 lb ft).
Important:
Safety Related Items
Tighten
◦ the towbar fixings to the specific torque.
All◦ fasteners supplied with the towbar kit are critical specification parts. In the
event of damage or loss of these parts, a replacement small parts kit should
be ordered.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3321246&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3321246 Page 4 of 10

Caution: Always check scale, size and position of all templates before drilling. Failing to do
so may cause damage to the vehicle, misalignment of components or the inability
to install the accessory.
10. Do not use any markings on the rear fascia when cutting out the receiver tube opening. Use
only the template (1) found on the last page of these instructions. Check the scale on the
template and cut the template out. Position the template as indicated by the template and
transfer the opening marks onto the rear of the fascia. Once the information has been
transferred, drill and cut out the opening.

11. Fit the pinch weld (1) around the towbar receiver tube cutout and trim as required.
Important: If fitting the superlift shock absorber kit, it is recommended that the air valve
mounting point be prepared whilst the fascia is removed from the vehicle.
Refer to superlift shock absorber kit fitting instructions.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3321246&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3321246 Page 5 of 10

Note: Your genuine HSPO towbar is supplied with a trailer wiring harness fixing bracket (1)
that is positioned behind the rear bumper fascia (2). The trailer harness is available
separately from HSPO. Refer to (trailer harness fitting instructions) to fit this part.

12. Reconnect the vehicle fascia connector (2) to the vehicle harness connector (1) prior to
refitting the rear fascia.
13. Refit the rear fascia to the vehicle.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3321246&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3321246 Page 6 of 10

14. Fit the towbar tongue (1) to the towbar and fix in place with the locking pin (2). Use the
retaining clip (3) to secure the locking pin.
15. Fit the “D” shackles (4) (2 places) supplied to the towbar fixing points.
Note:
When
◦ not towing, loosen the lock nut (5), tighten the anti-rattle bolt (6) against the
towbar tongue and retighten the lock nut against the towbar.
The
◦ M10 nut and anti-rattle bolt must be removed when the towbar is in use.
Towbar
◦ tongue is ADR compliant only when oriented as shown.
The
◦ “D” shackles may rattle if left on the vehicle when not in use.

Important: Open the drivers door, Clean and stick the ADR compliance label (1) to the drivers
“B” pillar.

Removal of the vehicle air blocker’s

1. Raise and support the vehicle and remove the front wheels.
2. Remove the front wheel arch liner. Remove the 11 screws (1) fixing the liner to the vehicle
and remove the 4 scrivets (2) around the wheel liner and remove the wheel liner (3).

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3321246&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3321246 Page 7 of 10

3. Disconnect the fascia harness (1) from the vehicle harness (2).

4. From under the vehicle, remove the 4 short fascia nappy bolts (1) and the 2 front long
fascia support bolts (2).

5. From under the vehicle bonnet, remove the 6 bolts (2) across the rear edge of the front
fascia cover and the 6 screws (3) across the front of the cover and remove the cover (1).

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3321246&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3321246 Page 8 of 10

6. Remove the 2 scrivets (3), retaining the fascia to the front cross member. Carefully pull the
fascia outwards to release the fascia from the fender retaining clips (1), then carefully pull
the fascia forwards to release the fascia retaining clips (2) under the headlamps, remove
the front fascia.

7. Once the front fascia has been removed, use a small flat bladed tool to release the 5 clips
retaining each of the air blockers (1).
8. Reinstall the vehicle fascia and refit all parts removed.
9. Place the fitting instructions in the glove box of the vehicle.

Trailer Hitch Draw Bar Package Installation

PARTS LIST

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

92293932 TOWBAR KIT 1600 / 2100 KG 1

TOWBAR CROSSBEAM WELDED ASM. (INCL


1
LABEL)

TOWBAR TONGUE PKG. 1

TOWBAR TONGUE ASM. 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3321246&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3321246 Page 9 of 10

PARTS LIST

TOWBAR TONGUE PIN & RETAINER CLIP 1


ASM.

TOWBAR SMALL PARTS KIT 1

“D” SHACKLE KIT 2

BOLT M10x105 4

BOOT PLATE 2

ADR COMPLIANCE LABEL 1

TRAILER WIRING HARNESS BRACKET 1

BOLT M10x1.5 (ANTI RATTLE) 1

NUT M10x1.5 (ANTI RATTLE) 1

PINCH WELD 1

92295934 FITTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

MANDATORY FIT FOR SOME APPLICATIONS (REFER TO OWNER’S HANDBOOK, (SOLD


SEPARATELY)

TRAILER HARNESS

ADDITIONAL TOW BAR ACCESSORIES (SOLD SEPARATELY)

LOAD DISTRIBUTION HITCH

SUPERLIFT SHOCK ABSORBER KIT - (SWB)

TOWBALL

TOWBALL COVER

Templates

1. Select the appropriate template to be printed.


Note: This then brings up the cutting template on its own.
2. Click on the magnifying glass in the procedure under the selected cutting template for a
detailed picture of the image.
Note: No other printing method is acceptable as they change the scale.
3. Click on the printer icon above the image next to the 1:1 in order to print in the correct
scale.
4. Use a copy machine to resize the template to ensure the vertical and horizontal axis on the
scale measure 50mm.
5. Cut out template.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3321246&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3321246 Page 10 of 10

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3321246&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3326157 Page 1 of 7

2014 Holden VF Sedan| VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Structural Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 3326157

Trailer Hitch Draw Bar Package Installation (All VF LPG


and Petrol Models Other Than Evoke Petrol 1600 / 2100
Kg Inst: 92295935)
Important: Use the receiver tube opening marked on the inside surface of the fascia only!

TOOLS REQUIRED:

Phillips head screwdriver, Small flat bladed screwdriver, Trim release tool, Knife, 18mm Spanner,
10mm Socket, 15mm Socket, 18mm Socket, Ratchet, Power Drill 10mm Drill bit, Extension bar and
torque wrench.

Important:

• Additional mandatory equipment is required for all towbars, refer to vehicle owner's
handbook for details.

Fitting Instructions:

1. Open the rear luggage compartment and remove the spare wheel and floor covering.

2. Use a trim release tool to remove the fir tree clips (1) (2 each end) in the ends of the rear
trim panel. Remove the rear trim panel (2) by pulling upwards and place to one side.

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3326157&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3326157 Page 2 of 7

3. Remove the scrivets (1) (2 places) and screw (2) retaining the bumper fascia from inside
the rear wheel arch. Repeat on other sides of the vehicle.

4. Remove the scrivets (1) (3 places) across the lower edge of the fascia.
5. Pull out the sides of the bumper fascia to release the fascia from the body retaining clip
and remove the fascia from the vehicle.

6. On the Left hand side of the vehicle, disconnect the rear fascia harness (1) and remove the
rear fascia.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3326157&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3326157 Page 3 of 7

7. Remove the impact absorber (1) from the vehicle and discard.

8. From inside the luggage compartment, remove the foil/butyl tape (1) covering the tow bar
fixing holes. Ensure all residue is removed.

Caution: Use the correct fastener in the correct location. Replacement fasteners must be
the correct part number for that application. Fasteners requiring replacement or
fasteners requiring the use of thread locking compound or sealant are identified
in the service procedure. Do not use paints, lubricants, or corrosion inhibitors on

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3326157&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3326157 Page 4 of 7

fasteners or fastener joint surfaces unless specified. These coatings affect


fastener torque and joint clamping force and may damage the fastener. Use the
correct tightening sequence and specifications when installing fasteners in order
to avoid damage to parts and systems.
9. Fit the towbar assembly (1) into the vehicle longitudinal rails. Align the bracket holes to
match the existing bumper mounting holes in the luggage compartment.
10. Place the floor reinforcing plates (2) supplied over the mounting holes and fit the fixing
bolts (3) (4 places).
Tighten
Tighten the fixing bolts (3) to 58 Y (42 lb ft).
Important:
Safety Related Items
Tighten
◦ the towbar fixings to the specific torque.
All◦ fasteners supplied with the towbar kit are critical specification parts. In the
event of damage or loss of these parts, a replacement small parts kit
should be ordered.

Important: Only cut out the “TOW BAR CUT OUT” opening marked on the inside
of the vehicle fascia and the “LPG” opening marked on the vehicle
fascia extension. Disregard all other markings.
11. Working from the “inside” of the vehicle fascia, drill four 10mm holes in each corner of
the witness lines for the towbar receiver tube opening marked on the inside face of the
fascia. Use a sharp knife to carefully cut out the opening.
12. Drill a 10mm hole in all corners of the opening marked in the fascia. Use a sharp knife to
carefully cut out the opening.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3326157&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3326157 Page 5 of 7

13. Fit the pinch weld (1) around the towbar receiver tube cutout and trim as required.
Important: If fitting the superlift shock absorber kit, it is recommended that the air valve
mounting point be prepared whilst the fascia is removed from the vehicle.
Refer to superlift shock absorber kit fitting instructions.

Note: Your genuine HSPO towbar is supplied with a trailer wiring harness fixing bracket (1)
that is positioned behind the rear bumper fascia (2). The trailer harness is available
separately from HSPO. Refer to (trailer harness fitting instructions) to fit this part.

14. Fit the towbar tongue (1) to the towbar and fix in place with the locking pin (2). Use the
retaining clip (3) to secure the locking pin.
15. Fit the “D” shackles (4) (2 places) supplied to the towbar fixing points.
Note:
When
◦ not towing, loosen the lock nut (5), tighten the anti-rattle bolt (6) against the
towbar tongue and retighten the lock nut against the towbar.
The
◦ M10 nut and anti-rattle bolt must be removed when the towbar is in use.
Towbar
◦ tongue is ADR compliant only when oriented as shown.
The
◦ “D” shackles may rattle if left on the vehicle when not in use.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3326157&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3326157 Page 6 of 7

Important: Open the drivers door, Clean and stick the ADR compliance label (1) to the
drivers “B” pillar.
16. Refit all parts removed in reverse order.
17. Place the fitting instructions in the glove box of the vehicle.

Trailer Hitch Draw Bar Package Installation

PARTS LIST

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

92289854 TOWBAR KIT 1600 / 2100 KG 1

TOWBAR ASM 1

TONGUE PKG. 1

TONGUE ASM. 1

J - PIN & R - CLIP ASM. 1

FITTING KIT 1

ADR COMPLIANCE PLATE 1

“D” SHACKLE 1

BOLT M10x105 4

BOOT PLATE 2

TRAILER HARNESS BRACKET 1

BOLT M10x1.5 (ANTI RATTLE) 1

NUT M10x1.5 (HEX) 1

PINCH WELD 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3326157&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3326157 Page 7 of 7

PARTS LIST

92295935 FITTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

MANDATORY FIT FOR SOME APPLICATIONS (REFER TO OWNER’S HANDBOOK,


(SOLD SEPARATELY)

TRAILER HARNESS

LOAD DISTRIBUTION HITCH

ADDITIONAL TOW BAR ACCESSORIES (SOLD SEPARATELY)

TOWBALL

BALL COVER

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3326157&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3340211 Page 1 of 8

2014 Holden VF Sedan| VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Structural Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 3340211

Trailer Hitch Draw Bar Package Installation (VF / WN


Petrol Sedan's 1200 Kg Inst: 92295931)

TOOLS REQUIRED:

Phillips head screwdriver, Small flat bladed screwdriver, Trim release tool, Knife, 18mm Spanner,
10mm Socket, 15mm Socket, 18mm Socket, Ratchet, Power Drill 10mm Drill bit, Extension bar and
torque wrench.

Important:

• The maximum load for the towbar is 1200kg only.


• Additional mandatory equipment is required for all towbars, refer to vehicle owner’s
handbook for details.
• 1200kg Towbar is for Petrol SWB & LWB Sedan vehicles only.

Fitting Instructions:

1. Open the rear luggage compartment and remove the spare wheel cover.
2. Remove the scrivets (1) (2 places) and screw (2) retaining the bumper fascia from inside
the rear wheel arch. Repeat on other sides of the vehicle.

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3340211&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3340211 Page 2 of 8

3. Remove the scrivets (1) (3 places) across the lower edge of the fascia.
4. Pull out the sides of the bumper fascia to release the fascia from the body retaining clip
and remove the fascia from the vehicle.

5. On the Left hand side of the vehicle, disconnect the rear fascia harness (1) and remove the
rear fascia.

6. Remove the impact absorber (1) from the vehicle and discard.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3340211&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3340211 Page 3 of 8

7. From inside the luggage compartment, remove the foil/butyl tape (1) covering the tow bar
fixing holes. Ensure all residue is removed.

Caution: Use the correct fastener in the correct location. Replacement fasteners must be
the correct part number for that application. Fasteners requiring replacement or
fasteners requiring the use of thread locking compound or sealant are identified
in the service procedure. Do not use paints, lubricants, or corrosion inhibitors on
fasteners or fastener joint surfaces unless specified. These coatings affect
fastener torque and joint clamping force and may damage the fastener. Use the
correct tightening sequence and specifications when installing fasteners in order
to avoid damage to parts and systems.
8. Using the M12 bolts (1), washers (2) and nuts (3) (2 places) with the M10 bolt (4) and nut
(5) (1 place) to assemble the towbar mounting brackets (6) to the towbar assembly (7).
Run the bolts up and tighten to the specified torque. Repeat on the other end of the
towbar.
Note: Ensure the large flat face of the nut is against the washer.
Tighten
Tighten the M12 nuts (3) to 100 Y (74 lb ft).Tighten
Tighten the M10 nuts (5) to 58 Y (42 lb ft).

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3340211&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3340211 Page 4 of 8

9. Insert the towbar into the longitudinal rails and mark around the bolt head (1) on the
towbar assembly. Remove the towbar and use the ball of an engineering hammer to
hammer the sheet metal inwards by 6mm on both sides of the vehicle.
Note: Take precautions not to split the vehicle paint.

10. Fit the towbar assembly (1) into the vehicle longitudinal rails and push home. Align the
bracket holes to match the existing bumper mounting holes in the luggage compartment.
11. Place the floor reinforcing plates (2) supplied over the mounting holes and fit the fixing
bolts (3) (4 places).
12. When all bolts have been fitted, tighten all bolts to their respective torque.
Tighten
Tighten the fixing bolts (3) to 58 Y (42 lb ft).
Important:
Safety Related Items
All◦ fasteners supplied with the towbar kit are critical specification parts. In the
event of damage or loss of these parts, a replacement small parts kit
should be ordered.
The
◦ nuts used in small parts kit should not be reused, replace with new nuts if
service is required.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3340211&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3340211 Page 5 of 8

13. On Evoke, Calais, SV6 and SS vehicles cut the “Petrol” towbar opening, LWB only has one
cutout marked, Drill a 10mm hole in all corners of the opening marked on the inside of
rear fascia. Use a sharp knife to carefully cut out the opening.

14. Fit the pinch weld (1) around the towbar receiver tube cutout and trim as required.

Note: Your genuine HSPO towbar is supplied with a trailer wiring harness fixing bracket (1)
that is positioned behind the rear bumper fascia (2). The trailer harness is available
separately from HSPO. Refer to (trailer harness fitting instructions) to fit this part.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3340211&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3340211 Page 6 of 8

15. Reconnect the vehicle fascia connector (2) to the vehicle harness connector (1) prior to
refitting the rear fascia.
16. Refit the rear fascia to the vehicle.

Note: If a towbar escutcheon has been purchased, it should be fitted prior to installation
of the towbar tongue.
17. Fix the towbar tongue using the bolts (1) and spring washers supplied.
Tighten
Tighten the bolts (1) to 190 Y (140 lb ft).
18. Fit the “D” shackles (2) (2 places) to the eyes on the towbar tongue.
Note:
Towbar
◦ tongue is ADR compliant only when oriented as shown.
The
◦ “D” shackles may rattle if left on the vehicle when not in use.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3340211&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3340211 Page 7 of 8

19. Open the drivers door, Clean and stick the ADR compliance label (1) to the drivers “B”
pillar.
20. Place the fitting instructions in the glove box of the vehicle.

Trailer Hitch Draw Bar Package Installation

PARTS LIST

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

92295931 TOWBAR KIT 1200 kg VF / WN 1

TOWBAR CROSSBEAM WELDED ASM. (INCL


1
LABEL)

TOWBAR SMALL PARTS KIT 1

TOWBAR TONGUE KIT. 1

“D” SHACKLE KIT 1

TRAILER WIRING HARNESS BRACKET 1

PINCH WELD 1

92295933 FITTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

MANDATORY FIT FOR SOME APPLICATIONS (REFER TO OWNER’S HANDBOOK, (SOLD


SEPARATELY)

TRAILER HARNESS

ADDITIONAL TOW BAR ACCESSORIES (SOLD SEPARATELY)

TOWBALL

TOWBALL COVER

TOWBAR ESCUTCHEON ( WN ONLY)

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3340211&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3340211 Page 8 of 8

PARTS LIST

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3340211&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2365412 Page 1 of 6

2014 Holden VF Sedan| VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Structural Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 2365412

Trailer Hitch Platform Package Installation


Table 1: Kit Contents
Table 2: Trailer Hitch Platform Package Installation

Accessories Part Number

92229993, 95710311, 95710310, 95710309

Kit Contents

Qty Description

1 Towball Head Assembly (Type 1)

1 Towball Head Assembly (Type 2)

2 Spiring Bar

2 Over Centre Latch Assembly

2 Bolt M12x72

2 Nut M12

2 Chain

2 Bolt M10x55

2 Washer - Flat M10

2 Nut M10

1 Tension Bar

2 'D' Shackle
© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2365412&cellId=20489... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2365412 Page 2 of 6

Qty Description

1 Installation Instructions

Tools Required

• Ratchet
• 16 mm, 17 mm and 18 mm Spanner
• 18 mm Socket

Procedure

1. Ensure that the trailer and tow vehicle are on level ground.

2. Insert the towball head assembly (4) into the towbar hitch receiver (2) and secure with
your 'J' Pin (1) and 'R' clip (3). Attach and secure your towball (5) to the towball head
assembly.
Note: Type 1 towball head assembly shown, type 2 is similar.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2365412&cellId=20489... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2365412 Page 3 of 6

3. Attach the trailer coupling (1) to the towball mount (2).

4. To set up the spring bars (2) correctly, the tow vehicle and trailer must contain the
intended load. Attach the spring bars (2) to the towball head assembly (3).
5. Align the spring bars (2) with the trailer 'A' frame (1) on the trailer.

6. Position the over centre latch assemblies (1) on the trailer 'A' frame (2) so that the working
chain links (4) on the spring bars (3) are vertical to the over centre latch assembly hooks.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2365412&cellId=20489... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2365412 Page 4 of 6

Note: On some trailers gas bottles or other accessories may need relocating to allow the
working link chains to hang vertically.

Caution: Use the correct fastener in the correct location. Replacement fasteners must be
the correct part number for that application. Fasteners requiring replacement or
fasteners requiring the use of thread locking compound or sealant are identified
in the service procedure. Do not use paints, lubricants, or corrosion inhibitors on
fasteners or fastener joint surfaces unless specified. These coatings affect
fastener torque and joint clamping force and may damage the fastener. Use the
correct tightening sequence and specifications when installing fasteners in order
to avoid damage to parts and systems.
7. Secure both over centre latches by tightening the M12 bolt (1). Use the M12 locking nut (2)
supplied to lock the bolt.
Tighten
Tighten the bolt to 10 Y.

8. Measure the height on the vehicle at two points (A&B). Use the jockey wheel on the trailer
(or if no jockey wheel attached, a bottle jack underneath the hitch assembly) to level the
vehicle.
Note: This is a safety precaution to reduce strain on the person performing the next step.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2365412&cellId=20489... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2365412 Page 5 of 6

9. Release the 'R' clip (2) on one of the over centre latch assemblies (4) and open the handle
(5). Attach the closest chain link (3) to the spring bar which allows the over centre latch to
be closed with moderate effort with the use of the tension bar (1). Firmly hold the tension
bar (1) while refitting the 'R' clip (2) through both holes. Repeat for the other side ensuring
the same number of links are maintained on both sides.

10. Release the weight from the jockey wheel / bottle jack and check the level of the tow
vehicle by measuring the heights as shown. Repeat step 9 to adjust chain length until the
vehicle is within 15mm of the values for (A&B).
Note: Ensure there are at least 4 chain links between the spring bar and the over centre
latch assembly when tensioned.
◦ Do not dismantle the LDH head assembly.
◦ Do not dismantle the spring bar assemblies.
◦ Take extreme care when attaching the working link chains to the over centre latch
assemblies.
◦ The hitch assembly and trunions are cast iron and therefore self-lubricating. Do NOT
use grease or oil on the mating surfaces as this will attract grit and dirt and increase
wear on the parts.
◦ Use the trailer jockey and wheel or a bottle jack to lift the trailer and vehicle to avoid
injury while adjusting the spring bars.
◦ Ensure there are at least 4 working chain links between the spring bar and over
centre latch, to allow for cornering affects.
◦ Wear on the trunions and upper and lower trunion sockets is normal. Replace the
components it the wear becomes excessive.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2365412&cellId=20489... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2365412 Page 6 of 6

◦ With use, the spring bars will develop a minor bend, which does not affect the
performance.
◦ If towing across a step incline (eg. driveway or boat ramp) it is recommended that
the spring bars are disconnected to prevent damage to the load distribution hitch
and/or the tow vehicle.

Trailer Hitch Platform Package Installation

92229993
95710311
Load Distribution Hitch Kit P/N
95710310
95710309

Part Number 92249978

Release Date 14 October 2009

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2365412&cellId=20489... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2221971 Page 1 of 5

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Exterior Structural Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 2221971

Vehicle Ornamentation Bar Package Installation

TOOLS REQUIRED:

Flat Bladed Screw Driver, Phillips Head Screw Driver, 20 TORX bit, 45 TORX bit, 8mm Socket, 12mm
Socket, Ratchet, 4mm Drill bit and Power drill.

FITTING INSTRUCTIONS:

1. If fitted,
1.1. Remove the soft tonneau cover.
1.2. Remove the hard tonneau cover.
2. IF THE VEHICLE IS FITTED WITH A STOP LAMP IN THE REAR CENTRE CAPPING FOLLOW
STEPS 3.1 & 3.2

3. Refer to Figure 1 for the following:


3.1. Remove the centre roof rear cap (1) by carefully spreading each end of the cap to
disengage the locking tabs (2).
NOTE: The upper edge of the cap is attached with double sided tape. To assist
removal, insert a flat blade screw driver and clean shop rag between the lower
edge of the centre roof rear cap and the rear window. Ensuring the locking tabs
are disengaged, pries the cap off in an upward and rearward direction. If the

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2221971&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2221971 Page 2 of 5

double sided tap is unserviceable, a centre roof cap repair kit can be
purchased. Refer to note on last page of this instructions.
3.2. Disconnect the high mount stop lamp connector (3) and Refit the centre cap.

4. Refer to Figure 8 for the following:


4.1. Apply the adhesive pads to the base of the sports bar uprights.
4.2. Extract the stop lamp harness (1) from inside the top bar (2) of the sports bar.
4.3. Feed the harness into the RHS assembly (3) and pull the harness through the hole in
the front bottom fixing leg (4).
4.4. Fit the top bar of the sports bar into the two side assemblies and use the fixings (5)
supplied to fix the assembly together loosely

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2221971&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2221971 Page 3 of 5

5. Remove the front four tie down bracket retaining bolts. Remove the front RHS tie down
bracket (1) only. Refer to Figure 9.

6. Refer to Figure 10 for the following:


6.1. Use a drill and sharp knife to remove material from the tube liner (1).
6.2. Use the cutout above the front RHS tie down mounting point to feed the sports bar
stop lamp harness (2) behind the tub liner and through into the cavity (3) between
the inner and outer sheet metal.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2221971&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2221971 Page 4 of 5

7. With all the tie down mounts (1) in position fit the sports bar (2) to the vehicle using the tie
down mounting points with the bolts supplied. Refer to Figure 11.
8. Once the sports bar is fitted tighten the sports bar fixing bolts to the specified torque.

9. Refer to Figure 12 for the following:


9.1. Pass a guide wire in from the rear RHS tub access opening (1) through to the front of
the vehicle going over the top of the fuel filler compartment (2).
9.2. From inside (3) the vehicle locate the guide wire and the sports bar stop lamp harness
(4), tape the harness to the guide wire and pull the harness to the back tub access
opening. Remove the guide wire.

10. Refer to Figure 13 for the following:


10.1. Remove the RHS Rear tail lamp cluster (1) (Refer to Owner’s handbook).
10.2. Disconnect the body harness (2) from the light cluster and connect the sports bar
patch harness (3) between the body harness and the light cluster. Feed the patch
harness into the vehicle body following the vehicle body harness. Refit the light
cluster.
10.3. Connect the sports bar harness (4) to the patch harness.
11. Refit all parts removed in reverse order.
12. Place the fitting instructions in the glove box of the vehicle.

Vehicle Ornamentation Bar Package Installation

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2221971&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2221971 Page 5 of 5

PARTS LIST

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

92198443 SPORTS BAR PACKAGE 1

NS SPORTS BAR ASSEMBLY 1

NS UPRIGHT, SPORTS BAR RH 1

NS UPRIGHT, SPORTS BAR LH 1

NS CROSS BEAM, SPORTS BAR 1

NS TAIL LIGHT PATCH HARNESS 1

NS ADHESIVE PADS 4

NS LAMP ASSY, CHMSL 1

NS SMALL PARTS KIT 1

92237831 FITTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

FD796 PROOF OF WARRANTY CARD 1

Available separately from HSPO

92144235 CENTRE ROOF CAP REPAIR KIT

NS - Not serviced SP - Serviced Part

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2221971&cellId=18858... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3292670 Page 1 of 5

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Electrical Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 3292670

Accessory Wiring Harness Package Installation (Cargo


Compartment Power Outlet)
Installation Instructions Part Number

92270031

Tools Required

• Phillips head screwdriver


• Jeweler screwdriver
• Trim release tool
• Wire cutters
• Paint pen
• Knife

FITTING INSTRUCTIONS:

Warning: Disconnect the vehicle battery before commencing the installation.


1. Remove the luggage compartment spare wheel cover.
2. Using a trim release tool, remove the fir tree clips or unscrew the luggage ties (2) (vehicle
level dependant) (2 each end) in the ends of the rear trim panel. Remove the rear trim
panel (1) by pulling upwards and place to one side.

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3292670&cellId=18855... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3292670 Page 2 of 5

3. Using a trim release tool, remove the fir tree clips (1) (2 places) holding the LHS
compartment trim to the side of the vehicle. Carefully dislodge the trim to gain access.

4. Disconnect the 3 connectors (1) from the rear electrical center by pushing in the locking
arm and rotating the locking arm.
5. Remove the rear electrical center retaining nut (2) and rotate the rear of the electrical
center to the center of the vehicle to release the front retaining hooks from the retaining
bracket.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3292670&cellId=18855... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3292670 Page 3 of 5

6. From the rear of the vehicle, run the power harness (1) along the vehicle body harness (2)
which runs behind the rear electrical center retaining bracket.

7. Locate connector X300 (2) (previously removed from the rear electrical center). Lever out
the 2 retention clips (1) and slide the black connector block out from it’s cover. Release
the terminal lock bar (3) and insert the power harness terminal (6) into pin position 24
(4). Close the terminal lock, cable tie (5) to the vehicle harness and refit the connector
cover.

8. Refit the rear electrical center and refit the connectors ensuring the locking arm rotates to
the locked position.
9. Cable tie the power cable harness (1) to the vehicle harness (2), in the vicinity of the
green spot tapes (3) on the power harness.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3292670&cellId=18855... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3292670 Page 4 of 5

10. Back off the earth bolt (5) on the rear vehicle sill and slide the power harness earth wire
(4) under the head of the earth bolt and tighten to 9.0±1.5 N.m of torque. Ensure both
terminals are flat to the vehicle sheet metal for a robust electrical ground connection.
11. Pass the leg of the power outlet mounting bracket (1) through the 50 mm hole (6) in the
rear sill sheet metal and use the bolt and washer supplied (3) to hold in position through
the angled elongated hole.
12. Align the power bracket with the 2 small holes in the sheet metal and use the 2 self
tapping screws and washers (2) to fix the bracket to the vehicle, tighten all bolts to
1.5±0.5 N.m of torque.
13. Cable tie the power harness (7) to the vehicle harness (9), in the vicinity of the green spot
tapes (8) on the power harness.

14. Reposition the left hand trim panel into it’s original position. Reach through the battery
access hole and use a paint pen to mark the shape of the socket mounting hole on the
back surface of the side trim.
15. Use a thin sharp knife to cut out the round bracket hole (2) in the trim panel. Make the
notch at the top of the hole.
16. Align the notch in the power outlet bezel (4) with the power socket cap (3) and fit the cap
onto the bezel. Align the notch on the power outlet bezel with the notch on the mounting
bracket hole and push the power outlet bezel into the hole in the carpet and mounting
bracket until it clicks.
17. Align the swage (6) in the barrel of the power socket (5) with the groove in the bezel and
push the power socket barrel home.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3292670&cellId=18855... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3292670 Page 5 of 5

18. Pass your hand through the access hole in the side trim panel and connect the power
harness (1) to the power socket.
19. Reconnect the vehicle battery and close the access panel.
20. Refit all parts.
21. Additional cable ties and fixings are supplied in the kit, once the installation is complete
they can be discarded.
22. Place the instructions into the vehicle glove box.

Accessory Wiring Harness Package Installation

PARTS LIST

DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

Cargo Compartment Power Outlet Kit


1
P/N 92260576

Power Socket and Bezel 1

Power Harness 1

Bracket 1

Bolt M5 1

Washer M5 3

Cable Tie 8

Self Tapping Screw 3

Installation Instructions 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3292670&cellId=18855... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2218111 Page 1 of 4

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Electrical Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 2218111

Food and Beverage Cooler/Warmer Package Installation

TOOLS REQUIRED:

Phillips Screwdriver, 10 mm Spanner, 6 mm Drill Bit, Knife, Rasp and Power Drill.

Note: The car fridge kit in the SWB (VE) Sedan requires a 12V power accessory kit sold separately.

FITTING INSTRUCTIONS:

1. Lift the spare wheel cover from the rear compartment.


2. Turn the spare wheel cover over and place some suitable material between the cover and
the work surface to keep the cover clean.
3. Select the appropriate template to be printed.
Note: This then brings up the cutting template on its own.
4. Click on the magnifying glass in the procedure under the selected cutting template for a
detailed picture of the image.
Note: No other printing method is acceptable as they change the scale.
5. Click on the printer icon above the image next to the 1:1 in order to print in the correct
scale.
6. Use a copy machine to resize the template to ensure the vertical and horizontal axis on the
scale measure 50 mm.
7. Cut out templates.
© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218111&cellId=18856... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2218111 Page 2 of 4

8. Refer to Figure 1 for the following:


8.1. Position the template (1) on the underside of the spare wheel cover as indicated on
template.
8.2. Remove the sound deadening (2) as indicated by the template.
8.3. Use a rasp to remove the rib (3) as indicated by the template.
Note: The surface must be flat to mount the clamping plate.

Caution: Always check scale, size and position of all templates before drilling. Failing to do
so may cause damage to the vehicle, misalignment of components or the
inability to install the accessory.
9. Use the template (1) to position the clamping plates (2) as indicated by the template and
use a 5.5 mm drill bit to drill through the spare wheel cover. Refer to Figure 2.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218111&cellId=18856... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2218111 Page 3 of 4

10. Refer to Figure 3 for the following:


10.1. Put the bolts (1) through the clamping plate (2) and spare wheel cover (3).
10.2. Position the holes in the fridge carrier bracket (4) onto the fixing bolts, place washers
(5) and one nut (6) on each bolt. Tighten the fixing bolts. Repeat on other fridge
carrier bracket.

11. Refer to Figure 4 for the following:


11.1. Thread the fridge-retaining strap through the slots in the brackets as shown. Ensure
the release buckle (1) is accessible in the centre of the vehicle.
11.2. Position the fridge in the vehicle so that the lid handle is towards the rear of the
vehicle. Clip the fastener on the strap to attach the fridge to the brackets and use the
adjustment buckle (2) to remove the slack from the strap.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218111&cellId=18856... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2218111 Page 4 of 4

12. Plug the DC power lead (1) through the forward bracket into the fridge and the other end
of the lead into the vehicle 12V DC power outlet. Refer to Figure 5.
Note: Some vehicles will required the fitment of a power socket.
13. Place the fitting instructions in the glovebox.

Food and Beverage Cooler/Warmer Package Installation

PARTS LIST

PART No. DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

92214394 FRIDGE STRAP KIT 1

BRACKET 2

CLAMPING PLATE - LHS 1

CLAMPING PLATE - RHS 1

M5 NUT 8

M5x12MM BOLT 8

WASHERS - FLAT 8

STRAP 1

FD1438 FITTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

FD796 PROOF OF WARRANTY CARD 1

NS - Not Serviced SP - Serviced Part

NOT SUPPLIED IN KIT BUT AVAILABLE SEPARATELY:

POWER WIRING HARNESS


FRIDGE
BOOT POWER SOCKET KIT

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218111&cellId=18856... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3402305 Page 1 of 14

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Electrical Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 3402305

Trailer Wiring Harness Package Installation (Fitting


Instruction P/N 92263523)
Table 1: Trailer Wiring Harness Package Installation
Table 2: Trailer Wiring Harness Package Installation

TOOLS REQUIRED:

Trim release tool, 10mm & 7mm Spanner, Side cutters, 4mm Drill bit, 6.5mm Drill bit, T30 Torx bit,
20mm hole saw, Power drill, Phillips head screwdriver and masking tape.

FITTING INSTRUCTIONS

Warning: Disconnect the vehicle battery before commencing the installation.

1. Open the tailgate of the vehicle and remove the spare wheel cover.
2. Pull up to remove the rear tailgate floor sill trim (1).

3. Remove the Left hand side luggage tie down fixing covers (1).
4. Remove the cap head bolt and remove the tie down points (2) (2 places).

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3402305&cellId=18569... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3402305 Page 2 of 14

5. Remove the left hand side under floor filler (1).


6. Remove the vehicle battery access cover.

Caution: Always check scale, size and position of all templates before drilling. Failing to do so
may cause damage to the vehicle, misalignment of components or the inability to
install the accessory.
7. Check the scale on the templates found at the end of this procedure and cut them out. Refer
to Templates.
Position the TIM Bracket Mounting Template (1) and tape in position.
8. Use a pilot drill to drill out the hole centre (2), then use a 4mm drill bit to open the holes out.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3402305&cellId=18569... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3402305 Page 3 of 14

9. Fit the TIM module (1) to the mounting bracket (2).

10. Connect the black and the white trailer harness connectors to the TIM module (1). Ensure the
lever (2) on the white connector is in the fully open position as shown, position the white
connector into the socket on the TIM and rotates to the locked position and the connector will
be fully seated.

11. Position the bracket inside the opening in the vehicle structure.
12. Use the 2 self tapping screw (2) and 2 flat washers (1) between the sheet metal and the TIM
bracket (3) on the lower screw location. Tighten to 1.5 ± 0.5 N.m of torque.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3402305&cellId=18569... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3402305 Page 4 of 14

13. Connect the trailer harness connector (5) into the vehicle body harness connector (6).
14. Leave the Electric Brake connector (4) taped to the trailer harness.
15. Run the trailer harness (1) along the vehicle harness. Flex the vehicle side trim panel (3)
sufficiently to pass the trailer harness out at the rear hatch opening.
16. Cable tie the trailer harness to the vehicle harness at the green spot tape positions (2) on the
trailer harness.
Note:
The
◦ 2–way connector (4) taped back to the trailer harness is the provision for electric
trailer brakes.
To◦ utilize this provision to install an after market electric trailer brake kit, please refer to
the detail in the Appendix.

17. Using the supplied cleaning pad clean the areas indicated where the adhesive anchors (4
places) will be fixed (1). Remove the backing paper from the anchor (2) and push down firmly
for 10 seconds on the pressure sensitive adhesive tape to ensure permanent adhesion.
18. Slide the cable tie through the anchor and around the trailer harness at the Green spot tape
positions (3) and pull tight. Remove the excess length of the cable tie.
Note: For LPG vehicles refer to Appendix.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3402305&cellId=18569... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3402305 Page 5 of 14

19. Check the scale on the drilling template for the grommet hole and cut out the drilling template
found at the end of this procedure and cut them out. Refer to Templates.
Position the template as indicated and tape into position.
20. Drill a 20mm hole (1) in the rear RHS rib (2) of the spare wheel well. Feed the corrugated
section of the harness (3) through the hole and seat the grommet (4) on the harness in the
hole.
21. Cut from the centre of the square adhesive patch (5), apply over the harness grommet and the
spare wheel well to form a seal and to prevent the grommet from being unseated.

22. Use a small phillips head screwdriver to connect the trailer harness wires (3) to their respective
pin connection. Connect the wires according to the table at the end of these instructions.
23. Secure the 2 screws (2) retaining the wire clamp (4) inside the trailer socket. Secure the
socket lid to the trailer socket using the 2 screws (1).
24. Slide the grommet (3) over the end of the socket and tape the grommet to the harness to
prevent water ingress.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3402305&cellId=18569... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3402305 Page 6 of 14

25. Check the scale on the appropriate template for your vehicle at the end of these instructions.
Cut out the template and tape in position (1) on the rear fascia as indicated on the
template.Refer to Templates.
26. Use a sharp object to mark the four hole positions. Remove the template and use a 4mm drill
bit to drill the holes.

27. If a Genuine Holden after market towbar is being installed use the stud plate (1) supplied in
the towbar kit to fix the plug to the vehicle.
If a Non Genuine towbar is being used, use the M4 bolts (2) supplied.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3402305&cellId=18569... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3402305 Page 7 of 14

28. Fit the trailer harness plug (3) to the bolts or fixing plate (1) and fix in place with the nuts (4)
provided. Tighten to 1.0 - 3.0 N.m of torque.
29. Cable tie (6) the trailer harness to the fascia using the holes indicated on the template.
Note: On some vehicle variants the fascia (2) will have a double skin (5) in this area, remove
the fixings along the edge of the fascia to gain access to the holes drilled and place the
stud plate in position. Fit the bumper fascia back together.
30. Once the installation has been carried out, configure the TIM Module using TIS2 WEB SPS. For
further details refer to . Trailer Lamp Control Module Programming and Setup.
31. Test all operations of the trailer harness.
32. Refit all parts removed in reverse order.
33. Place the fitting instructions in the glove box of the vehicle.

APPENDIX (LPG Vehicle Drilling information)

1. Drill a 20mm hole (4) in the rear load floor panel (3) at the location marked on the panel,
remove any burrs and feed the corrugated section of the trailer harness (2) through the hole
and seat the grommet (1) in the hole.
2. Cut from the centre of the square adhesive patch (5), apply over the harness grommet and the
spare wheel well to form a seal and to prevent the grommet from being unseated.

APPENDIX: ELECTRIC TRAILER BRAKE PROVISION

Mating connector housing P/N: Yazaki 7282-6458-40

Mating connector terminal P/N: Yazaki 7114-4120-02 (for wire 0.5-1.0 mm)

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3402305&cellId=18569... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3402305 Page 8 of 14

Mating connector terminal P/N: Yazaki 7114-4121-02 (for wire 1.0-2.5 mm)

PIN 1: Brake (Out) : Electric Trailer Brake control output positive feed to trailer brakes.

PIN 2: Brake (In) : Positive switched Brake stop lamp signal to Electric Trailer Brake control input.

Templates

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3402305&cellId=18569... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3402305 Page 9 of 14

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3402305&cellId=18569... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3402305 Page 10 of 14

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3402305&cellId=18569... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3402305 Page 11 of 14

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3402305&cellId=18569... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3402305 Page 12 of 14

Caution: Always check scale, size and position of all templates before drilling. Failing to do so
may cause damage to the vehicle, misalignment of components or the inability to
install the accessory.
1. Select the appropriate template to be printed.
2. Click on the magnifying glass in the procedure under the selected cutting template for a
detailed picture of the image.
Note: This then brings up the cutting template on its own.
3. Click on the printer icon above the image next to the 1:1 in order to print in the correct scale.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3402305&cellId=18569... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3402305 Page 13 of 14

Note: No other printing method is acceptable as they change the scale.


4. Use a copy machine to resize the template to ensure the vertical and horizontal axis on the
scale measure 50mm.

Trailer Wiring Harness Package Installation

Plug Assembly Table

PIN CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION WIRE COLOR

1 Left-hand turn Yellow

2 Reversing signal Black

3 Earth return White (Thick)

4 Right-hand turn Green

5 Service brakes Blue

6 Stop lamps Red

7 Rear lamps, clearance and slide Brown

A Earth (Next to Pin 4) White (Thin)

B Parking Aid Ground (Next to Pin 1) Grey

Trailer Wiring Harness Package Installation

PARTS LIST

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

92263519
TRAILER HARNESS KIT 1
92274931

WIRING HARNESS 1

TRAILER INTERFACE MODULE (TIM) 1

BOLTS M4 2

NUT M4 2

WASHER – FLAT 4

ADHESIVE FOIL PAD 1

BRACKET 1

CABLE TIE SHORT 15

CABLE TIE LONG 2

SELF DRILLING SCREW M4 2

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3402305&cellId=18569... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3402305 Page 14 of 14

PARTS LIST

CABLE TIE ANCHOR 7

ALCOHOL WIPE 2

TRAILER SOCKET 1

92263523 FITTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3402305&cellId=18569... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3402465 Page 1 of 8

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Electrical Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 3402465

Trailer Wiring Harness Package Installation (Fitting


Instruction P/N 92270926)
TOOLS REQUIRED:

Trim release tool, 10mm, 7mm Spanner, Side cutters, Phillips head screwdriver, 4mm Drill bit, Power
drill and Masking tape.

FITTING INSTRUCTIONS

Warning: Disconnect the vehicle battery before commencing the installation.

1. Remove the fixings (2) retaining the rear fascia from the wheel arch and the scrivets (1) from
along the under side of the fascia.
2. Pull the fascia out from the side of the vehicle to release the fascia from the retaining clips and
remove the fascia.

3. Open the tray liner left hand side access panel (7). Look inside the opening and identify the
large round hole (5) at the bottom rear corner.
4. From under the vehicle locate the large round hole and feed the trailer harness connector (1)
through into the space behind the access panel.
5. Release the blanking connector (3) from the vehicle sheet metal. Remove the blanking
connector from the body harness connector (2) and discard.
© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3402465&cellId=18569... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3402465 Page 2 of 8

6. Connect the trailer harness connector to the vehicle body harness connector and clip the
connector back to the vehicle panel.
7. Attach the wiring clip (8) on the trailer harness into the oval slot in the vehicle sheet metal.
8. Cable tie the trailer harness to the vehicle body harness where indicated by the green spot tape
(4). Trim off excess cable tie length 2 places.
9. Leave the Electric Brake power connector (6) taped to the trailer harness.
Note:
The
◦ 2-way connector (6) taped back to the trailer harness is the provision for electric
trailer brakes.
To◦ utilize this provision to install an after market electric trailer brake kit, please refer to
the detail in the Appendix.

10. On the outside of the vehicle run the trailer harness (3) along the vehicle body harness (2) and
cable tie (1) to the body harness at the vehicle harness fixing points as indicated by the Green
spot tape positions (4).

11. Clean the left hand front corner of the rear vehicle sheet metal, with the alcohol wipe supplied.
Remove the backing paper from the cable tie anchor and push and hold for several seconds to
ensure permanent adhesion.
12. Cable tie the trailer harness to the anchor at the location indicated by the green spot tape.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3402465&cellId=18569... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3402465 Page 3 of 8

Caution: Always check scale, size and position of all templates before drilling. Failing to do so
may cause damage to the vehicle, misalignment of components or the inability to
install the accessory.
13. Check the scale on the templates found at the end of this procedure and cut them out. Refer
to Templates.
14. Position and tape the template (1) as indicated on the instructions and drill the 4mm holes.
Remove the template.

15. Reconnect the fascia electrical connector and reinstall the vehicle fascia to the vehicle.
16. If a Genuine Holden after market towbar is being installed use the stud plate (1) supplied in
the towbar kit to fix the plug the vehicle.
17. If a Non Genuine towbar is being used use the M4 bolts (2) supplied.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3402465&cellId=18569... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3402465 Page 4 of 8

18. Pass the stud plate through from the back of the fascia and fix the trailer harness plug to the
vehicle. Tighten to 1- 3 N.m of torque.

Note: Inside the left hand side of the vehicle.


19. Move the passenger seat (1) fully forward and tilt the seat forwards.
20. Lift the battery cover trim to gain access to the rear electrical centre.

21. Disconnect the 4 connectors (3) from the rear electrical centre (1). Remove rear electrical
centre retaining nut (2) and rotate the rear electrical centre forward to release the electrical
centre from its retaining bracket.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3402465&cellId=18569... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3402465 Page 5 of 8

22. Use side cutters to release the two connectors (1) cable tied to the TIM bracket (2). Remove
and discard the Cable tie clip from the TIM mounting bracket.

23. Connect the black and the white trailer harness connectors to the TIM module (1). Ensure the
lever (2) on the white connector is in the fully open position as shown, position the white
connector into the socket on the TIM and rotates to the locked position and the connector will
be fully seated.

24. Slide the TIM module (1) onto the TIM bracket.
25. Reinstall the rear electrical centre and refit the retaining nut and tighten to 9±1.5N.m of
torque. Reconnect the 4 connectors to the rear electrical centre.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3402465&cellId=18569... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3402465 Page 6 of 8

26. Once the installation has been carried out, configure the TIM Module using TIS2 WEB SPS. For
further details refer to Trailer Lamp Control Module Programming and Setup.
27. Test all operations of the trailer harness.
28. Refit all parts removed in reverse order.
29. Place the fitting instructions in the glove box of the vehicle.

APPENDIX: ELECTRIC TRAILER BRAKE PROVISION

Note: Mating connector housing is already provided on trailer harness.

Mating connector terminal P/N: Tyco 927770-1 (for wire 0.5-1.0 mm)

Mating connector terminal P/N: Tyco 927777-1 (for wire 1.0-2.5 mm)

Mating connector terminal seal P/N: Tyco 828904-1 (for wire 0.5-1.0 mm)

Mating connector terminal seal P/N: Tyco 828904-1 (for wire 0.5-1.0 mm)

PIN 1: Brake (Out): Electric Trailer Brake control output positive feed to trailer brakes.

PIN 2: Brake (In): Positive switched Brake stop lamp signal to Electric Trailer Brake control input.

Templates

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3402465&cellId=18569... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3402465 Page 7 of 8

Caution: Always check scale, size and position of all templates before drilling. Failing to do so
may cause damage to the vehicle, misalignment of components or the inability to
install the accessory.
1. Select the appropriate template to be printed.
2. Click on the magnifying glass in the procedure under the selected cutting template for a
detailed picture of the image.
Note: This then brings up the cutting template on its own.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3402465&cellId=18569... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3402465 Page 8 of 8

3. Click on the printer icon above the image next to the 1:1 in order to print in the correct scale.
Note: No other printing method is acceptable as they change the scale.
4. Use a copy machine to resize the template to ensure the vertical and horizontal axis on the
scale measure 50mm.

Trailer Wiring Harness Package Installation

PARTS LIST

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

92263520
TRAILER HARNESS KIT 1
92274932

WIRING HARNESS 1

TRAILER INTERFACE MODULE (TIM) 1

CABLE TIE 15

CABLE TIE ANCHOR 2

BOLT M4 2

NUT M4 2

WASHER M4 2

ALCOHOL WIPE 1

92270926 FITTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3402465&cellId=18569... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3402700 Page 1 of 12

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Electrical Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 3402700

Trailer Wiring Harness Package Installation (Fitting


Instruction P/N 92270927)
TOOLS REQUIRED:

Trim release tool, 7mm Spanner, 10mm Socket, Torque wrench, Small flat bladed screwdriver, 4mm Drill
bit, Power drill, Side cutters, Phillips head screwdriver and Masking tape.

FITTING INSTRUCTIONS

Warning: Disconnect the vehicle battery before commencing the installation.

1. Remove the spare wheel cover.


2. Use a trim release tool to remove the fir tree clips (1) or unscrew the luggage ties (vehicle level
dependant) (2 each end) in the ends of the rear trim panel (2). Remove the rear trim panel by
pulling upwards and place to one side.

3. Remove the scrivets (1) (2 places) and screw (2) retaining the bumper fascia from inside the
rear wheel arch.
Repeat on other side of the vehicle.

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3402700&cellId=18569... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3402700 Page 2 of 12

4. Remove the scrivets (1) (3 places) across the lower edge of the fascia.
5. Pull out the sides of the fascia to release the fascia from the vehicle body retaining clip and
release the fascia from the vehicle.

6. On the Left hand side of the vehicle Disconnect the rear fascia harness (1) and remove the
fascia.

7. Use a trim release tool to remove the fir tree clips (1) (2 places) holding the LHS compartment
trim to the side of the vehicle. Dislodge the trim to gain access to the rear electrical centre.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3402700&cellId=18569... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3402700 Page 3 of 12

8. Unclip the body harness and the connector from the vehicle. Push the grommet into the vehicle
and feed the harness and connector back inside the vehicle.
9. From outside the vehicle feed the trailer harness and connectors through the grommet hole (1)
and seat the harness grommet in the grommet hole.
10. Clip the replacement external connector to the vehicle body fixing point (2) and fit the harness
cable clip in to the clip fixing point.

11. Disconnect the 3 connectors (1) from the rear electrical centre by pushing in the locking arm
lock and rotating the locking arm.
12. Remove the rear electrical centre retaining nut (2) and rotate the rear electrical centre to the
centre of the vehicle to release the front retaining hooks from the retaining bracket.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3402700&cellId=18569... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3402700 Page 4 of 12

13. From the rear of the vehicle run the trailer harness (1) along the vehicle body harness path
which runs behind the rear electrical centre retaining bracket.

14. Fit the TIM module mounting bracket (3) to the Rear electrical centre mounting bracket (2) by
passing the stud (1) on the TIM module mounting bracket through the top hole in the Rear
electrical centre mounting bracket and aligning the anti rotation tag (6) on the TIM module
mounting bracket with the lower hole in the Rear electrical centre mounting bracket, fit the nut
(5) to the stud to retain the assembly, tighten to 9±1.5N.m of torque.
15. Slide the Tim Module (4) onto the mounting bracket.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3402700&cellId=18569... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3402700 Page 5 of 12

16. Connect the black and the white trailer harness connectors to the TIM module (1). Ensure the
lever (2) on the white connector is in the fully open position as shown, position the white
connector into the socket on the TIM and rotates to the locked position and the connector will
be fully seated.

17. Cable tie the trailer harness (1) to the vehicle harness (3), at the locations identified with
green spot tapes (2).
18. Refit the rear electrical centre to the mounting bracket and tighten the retaining nut to
9±1.5N.m of torque.

19. Release the 6-way vehicle trailer breakout connector (7) from the vehicle harness, take care
not to damage the vehicle harness. Connect the 6-way trailer harness connector (5) into the
vehicle trailer breakout connector.
20. Connect the 20-way trailer harness fascia connector (2) to the 20-way vehicle body harness
fascia harness connector (3) that was fed back into the vehicle previously. Wrap the
connectors with the foam pads (4) supplied and neatly cable tie the harnesses and connectors
to the vehicle body harness (6).
Note:
The
◦ 2-way connector (1) taped back to the trailer harness is the provision for electric
trailer brakes.
To◦ utilize this provision to install an after market electric trailer brake kit, please refer to
the detail in the Appendix.
Ensure
◦ components are securely fastened and will not rattle against adjacent vehicle
hardware. If required, use remaining foam pads to eliminate rattle of any
components.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3402700&cellId=18569... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3402700 Page 6 of 12

21. Run the trailer harness plug lead (2) over the top of the vehicle towbar (1) and run the plug
lead down along the forward face of the towbar. Use the long cable ties (3) to retain the plug
lead to the towbar at the locations identified with green spot (4) tape 2 places.

Caution: Always check scale, size and position of all templates before drilling. Failing to do so
may cause damage to the vehicle, misalignment of components or the inability to
install the accessory.
22. Check the scale on the templates found at the end of this procedure and cut them out. Refer
to Templates.
23. Position the template (1) on the rear vehicle fascia with masking tape as shown on the
template and mark the four hole positions.
24. Use a 4mm drill bit to drill the four holes in the rear fascia.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3402700&cellId=18569... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3402700 Page 7 of 12

25. Reconnect the fascia electrical connector and reinstall the vehicle fascia to the vehicle.
26. If a Genuine Holden after market towbar is being installed use the stud plate (1) supplied in
the towbar kit to fix the plug the vehicle.
27. If a Non Genuine towbar is being used use the M4 bolts (2) supplied.

28. Pass the stud plate through from the back of the fascia and fix the trailer harness plug to the
vehicle. Tighten to 1- 3 N.m of torque.
29. Use a cable tie to secure the trailer harness plug lead to the fascia using the two other holes
drilled into the fascia.
30. Once the installation has been carried out, configure the TIM Module using TIS2 WEB SPS. For
further details refer to Trailer Lamp Control Module Programming and Setup.
31. Test all operations of the trailer harness.
32. Refit all parts removed in reverse order.
33. Place the fitting instructions in the glove box of the vehicle.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3402700&cellId=18569... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3402700 Page 8 of 12

APPENDIX: ELECTRIC TRAILER BRAKE PROVISION

Mating connector housing P/N: Yazaki 7282-6458-40

Mating connector terminal P/N: Yazaki 7114-4120-02 (for wire 0.5-1.0 mm)

Mating connector terminal P/N: Yazaki 7114-4121-02 (for wire 1.0-2.5 mm)

PIN 1: Brake (Out) : Electric Trailer Brake control output positive feed to trailer brakes.

PIN 2: Brake (In) : Positive switched Brake stop lamp signal to Electric Trailer Brake control input.

Templates

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3402700&cellId=18569... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3402700 Page 9 of 12

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3402700&cellId=18569... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3402700 Page 10 of 12

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3402700&cellId=18569... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3402700 Page 11 of 12

Caution: Always check scale, size and position of all templates before drilling. Failing to do so
may cause damage to the vehicle, misalignment of components or the inability to
install the accessory.
1. Select the appropriate template to be printed.
2. Click on the magnifying glass in the procedure under the selected cutting template for a
detailed picture of the image.
Note: This then brings up the cutting template on its own.
3. Click on the printer icon above the image next to the 1:1 in order to print in the correct scale.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3402700&cellId=18569... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3402700 Page 12 of 12

Note: No other printing method is acceptable as they change the scale.


4. Use a copy machine to resize the template to ensure the vertical and horizontal axis on the
scale measure 50mm.

Trailer Wiring Harness Package Installation

PARTS LIST

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

92263521
TRAILER HARNESS KIT 1
92274933

WIRING HARNESS 1

TRAILER INTERFACE MODULE (TIM) 1

BRACKET 1

NUT M6 1

CABLE TIE SHORT 10

CABLE TIE LONG 3

BOLT M4 2

NUT M4 2

WASHER 2

FOAM PAD 3

92270927 FITTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3402700&cellId=18569... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3344328 Page 1 of 2

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Wheels and Chassis | Accessories | Document ID: 3344328

Vehicle Labels Label Package Installation (20ʺ


Accessory Wheel and Tire)
Kit Contents

Part
Number Qty Description

92276547 1 20” ACCESSORY WHEEL AND TIRE LABEL KIT

1 LABEL PKG – VEH LABELS

1 TIRE PLACARD

92276549 1 FITTING INSTRUCTIONS

Tools Required

• Torque Wrench
• Cleaning Cloth
• Tire Fitting Station

Procedure

Open the drivers door and clean the surface of the “B” pillar and apply the tire information
Placard (1) to the pillar below the original placard. Do not remove the original tire placard.

Front Axle Set

Wheel: 20″x8.5″ J Tire: 245/40R20 95Y

Rear Axle Set

Wheel: 20″x9.0″ J Tire: 275/35R20 97 Y

• Wheels and tires should be the following recommended combination for Redline. (see
table).
• Rim sizes can be found marked on the inside surface of the rim.
© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3344328&cellId=25511... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 3344328 Page 2 of 2

Refer to Service Manual for wheel and tire assembly instructions.

Spare Tire & Wheel Usage

1. Is the vehicle fitted with an inflator kit?


If yes then no further action required.
2. Is the vehicle fitted with a spare wheel?
If yes then check that a temporary usage sticker or 80 km/h sticker is fitted.

3. If no sticker is fitted, order in one of the above stickers and fit to spare wheel.

Dealer Checklist

• Spare tire/inflator kit checked?


• Supplied placard fitted?
• Is the 245/40R20 95Y tire fitted on the 20″ x 8.5″J rim?
• Is the 275/35R20 97Y tire fitted on the 20″ x 9.0″J rim?
• Is the 245/40R20 95Y tire & rim on the front axle set?
• Is the 275/35R20 97Y tire & rim on the rear axle set?
• Wheel-tire assembly phase-matched (red dot on tire aligned with yellow sticker on
wheel)?
• Wheel-tire assembly balanced?
• Pilot bore of wheel lubricated with GM-recommended grease?
• Tire pressures checked on-vehicle?
• TPMS learning performed?
• Wheel nuts fastened to GM service manual specified torque?

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=3344328&cellId=25511... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2218110 Page 1 of 16

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Performance Accessories | Accessories | Document ID: 2218110

Rear Shock Absorber Package Installation

Note: Once the installation is completed pressurize the super lift shock absorber system to a
minimum of 100kpa before lowering the vehicle to the ground. Refer to the Owner’s Handbook
for system operation.

TOOLS REQUIRED:

Phillips head screwdriver, Trim release tool, Side cutters, 10mm Spanner, 18mm Spanner, 18mm
Socket, 16mm Socket, Ratchet, Long extension, 6mm Allan Key, 3.5mm Drill bit, 6.4mm & 8mm
Drill bit, Power drill, Spring compressors and leaver. 55mm Hole saw for Berlina, Calais, Caprice,
Statesman Two post hoist (Recommended).

FITTING INSTRUCTIONS:

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218110&cellId=18860... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2218110 Page 2 of 16

Note: Refer to the Owner’s Handbook and remove the rear wheels from the vehicle. Allow
the vehicle suspension to fully extend.
1. Refer to Figure 1 for the following:
1.1. Remove the lower shock absorber retaining bolt and nut (1) fixing the shock absorber
to the lower control arm (2).
1.2. Remove the lower control arm to knuckle retaining bolt and nut (3).
1.3. Clean the threads of the bolts removed and discard the two nuts remove in steps 1
and 2.
1.4. Use a lever to remove the knuckle and the shock absorber from the lower control
arm.

2. Use a socket and extension bar to remove the vehicle spring housing retaining bolts (1) (4
places). Support and remove the assembly (2). Refer to Figure 2.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218110&cellId=18860... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2218110 Page 3 of 16

3. Refer to Figure 3 for the following:


3.1. Make a mark in the centre of the side face of the shock absorber lower mounting point
(1), make a second mark on the spring housing (2) that aligns with the centre line of
the shock absorber.
3.2. Using the spring compressor (3) to compress the spring sufficiently to remove the
spring tension from the shock absorber assembly.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218110&cellId=18860... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2218110 Page 4 of 16

4. Refer to Figure 4 for the following:


4.1. Make a mark on the top surface of the upper thrust washer (1) so that you will be able
to distinguish it from the lower thrust washer (2) and orient the washer correctly
when reassembling.
4.2. Use a 6mm Allen key (3) and an 18mm ring spanner to release the shock absorber
retaining nut (4) from the spring housing (5) and discard the nut.
4.3. Remove the spring housing from the shock absorber.
4.4. Make a mark on the top surface of the lower thrust washer and remove.
4.5. Remove and discard the jounce bumper (6) and dirt shield cap (7).
4.6. Remove the shock absorber (8) from the spring. Discard the shock absorber.

5. Use a pilot drill to make a hole (1) in the flat surface on the inboard side of the spring
housings. Open the pilot hole out to 6.4mm. De-bur the hole and coat with a high zinc
content anti-corrosion paint. Refer to Figure 5.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218110&cellId=18860... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2218110 Page 5 of 16

6. Cut the shock absorber airline supplied in half.

7. Refer to Figure 6 for the following: Remove the transportation screw (1) from the super lift
shock absorber (2) and use a 2.5 mm Allen key (3)(supplied) to screw in the airline
connector (4). Press down on the top of the airline connector (5) should it be necessary to
remove the airline from the shock absorber assembly. Tighten to specified torque.

8. Refer to Figure 7 for the following:


8.1. Slide the supplied plastic bush (1) on to the airline and pass the airline (2) through the
6.4mm hole (3). Apply a cable tie (4) 120mm in from the end. The cable tie should
not move on the airline.
8.2. Ensure the end of the airline is cut square and push the airline into the airline
connection (5) on the side of the super lift shock absorber.
8.3. Reinstall the lower thrust washer (6) with the raised marked face up on the top fixing
of the shock absorber (7) and fit the shock absorber into the spring housing (8).

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218110&cellId=18860... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2218110 Page 6 of 16

Reinstall the top thrust washer (9) with the raised face down as marked to the top
shock absorber fixing followed by the new retaining nut (10) (supplied).
8.4. Push the plastic bush into the spring housing to prevent chaffing on the airline.

9. Refer to Figure 8 for the following:


9.1. Align the centre of the side face of the shock absorber lower mounting point (1), and
the mark on the spring housing (2) with the centre line of shock absorber (3).
9.2. When the marks are aligned use an allen key (4) and ring spanner to tighten the top
shock absorber fixing nut (5) to the specified torque.
9.3. Pass the shock absorber down through the top of the spring.
Note: Ensure the spring seat rubber (6) is seated correctly on the spring housing and
the end of the spring (7) is seated correctly against the spring stop.
9.4. Install the lower spring retaining plate (8) and the retaining half collets (9).
9.5. Release the spring compressor and confirm the spring housing to shock absorber
alignment is correct.
9.6. Refit the spring assembly on the vehicle and bolt the spring housing up. Tighten to
specified torque. Refer to Figure 2.
9.7. Use a drop of sealant (10) to hold the spacers (11) on each side of the lower shock
absorber mounting. Refer to Figure 7.
9.8. Use a lever in the lower control arm to relocate the lower shock absorber and lower
rear knuckle into position. Reinstall the bolts and fit the replacement nuts supplied.
Use a spanner to hold the bolt head and tighten the nuts to there respective torques.
Refer to specified torque in figure 1.
9.9. Repeat the process on the other side of the vehicle.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218110&cellId=18860... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2218110 Page 7 of 16

10. Refer to Figure 9 for the following:


10.1. Use tape to attach the free end of the airline to a guide wire. Run the airline from
the spring housing around the rear axle assembly mounting point (5) feed the guide
wire into the rear cross member box section (6) and out of the gap (7) in the rear of
the box section. Pull the airline through the box section.
Note: Ensure the airline has no kinks when routing the airline.
10.2. Remove the guide wire.
10.3. Use a 3.5mm drill bit to drill through the four ribs (1) on the underside of the spare
wheel tub (2) close to the surface of the wheel tub as possible.
10.4. Drill two 3.5mm holes through both sides of the wheel tub centre scrivet standoff
(3).
10.5. When routing the plastic airline (4) ensure that the airline is not kinked or creased.
The airline should not have loops present and should closely follow the vehicle
contours.
10.6. Run the airlines down the wheel tub and along the channel in the base of the wheel
well. Feed the airline through the holes drilled in the ribs and the scrivet standoff to
the rear of the vehicle.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218110&cellId=18860... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2218110 Page 8 of 16

11. Refer to Figure 10 for the following:


11.1. Select the appropriate template to be printed.
Note: This then brings up the cutting template on its own.
11.2. Click on the magnifying glass in the procedure under the selected cutting template
for a detailed picture of the image.
Note: No other printing method is acceptable as they change the scale.
11.3. Click on the printer icon above the image next to the 1:1 in order to print in the
correct scale.
11.4. Use a copy machine to resize the template to ensure the vertical and horizontal axis
on the scale measure 50mm.
11.5. Cut out the template.
11.6. Position the template on the underside of the rear fascia as indicated on the
template.
11.7. Use a sharp object to mark the hole position on the fascia. Remove the template.
Caution: Always check scale, size and position of all templates before drilling. Failing to do
so may cause damage to the vehicle, misalignment of components or the
inability to install the accessory.
12. Use a 2mm drill bit to drill a hole (1) in the fascia (2). If the vehicle is a Statesman,
Caprice, Berlina and Calais continue to drill through the second fascia skin (3). On Omega,
SV6, SS, and SSV vehicles drill out the pilot hole to 8mm. Refer to figure 9.
13. For Statesman, Caprice, Berlina and Calais the rear fascia will need to be removed to drill
out the pilot hole in the rear fascia inner skin to 55mm (4) and an 8mm hole in the outer
fascia to receive the air valve. Refer to the towbar fitting instructions for rear fascia
removal. Refer to figure 9.
Note: Release the scrivets holding the two fascia skins together and increase the gap
between the fascias to ensure the hole saw dose not cut through the outer fascia.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218110&cellId=18860... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2218110 Page 9 of 16

14. Refer to Figure 11 for the following:


14.1. Trim the airline (1) to length, slide the airline retaining nuts (2) onto the airlines and
fit the rubber O-rings (3).
14.2. Fit the airline into the air valve (4) and screw the retaining nuts onto the air valve
(hand tighten only).
14.3. Fit the air valve into the rear fascia, fit the Decal (5), washer (6) and nut (7) to the
threaded valve and hand tighten.
14.4. Pressurize the system to a minimum of 100kpa.
14.5. Fit the dust cap (8).
Note: The super lift shock absorber system must always have a minimum of 100kpa
of pressure when the vehicle in on its wheels.
15. Refit all parts removed in reverse order.
16. Place the fitting instructions in the glove box of the vehicle.

Rear Shock Absorber Package Installation

PARTS LIST

SWB SUPERLIFT SHOCKER PACKAGE

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

92203853 SUPERLIFT SHOCKER PACKAGE 1

NS SHOCK ABSORBER PACKAGE 2

NS COLLETS 4

NS SPRING SEAT 2

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218110&cellId=18860... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2218110 Page 10 of 16

PARTS LIST

NS BUSH SPACER 4

NS NUT 6

SP CLIP AIRLINE 3

NS AIRLINES AND VALVE PACKAGE 1

FD1436 FITTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

FD796 PROOF OF WARRANTY CARD 1

SWB SUPERLIFT SHOCKER SERVICE PACKAGE

92203851 SERVICE PACKAGE 1

NS SHOCK ABSORBER 1

NS COLLETS 2

NS SPRING SEAT 1

NS BUSH SPACER 2

NS NUT 3

SP CLIP AIRLINE 3

NS AIRLINES AND VALVE PACKAGE 1

FD1436 FITTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

FD796 PROOF OF WARRANTY CARD 1

LWB SUPERLIFT SHOCKER PACKAGE

92203854 SUPERLIFT SHOCKER PACKAGE 1

NS SHOCK ABSORBER PACKAGE 2

NS COLLETS 4

NS SPRING SEAT 2

NS BUSH SPACER 4

NS NUT 6

SP CLIP AIRLINE 3

NS AIRLINES AND VALVE PACKAGE 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218110&cellId=18860... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2218110 Page 11 of 16

PARTS LIST

FD1436 FITTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

FD796 PROOF OF WARRANTY CARD 1

LWB SUPERLIFT SHOCKER SERVICE PACKAGE

92203852 SERVICE PACKAGE 1

NS SHOCK ABSORBER 1

NS COLLETS 2

NS SPRING SEAT 1

NS BUSH SPACER 2

NS NUT 3

SP CLIP AIRLINE 3

NS AIRLINES AND VALVE PACKAGE 1

FD1436 FITTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

FD796 PROOF OF WARRANTY CARD 1

NS - NOT SERVICED SP - SERVICED PART

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218110&cellId=18860... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2218110 Page 12 of 16

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218110&cellId=18860... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2218110 Page 13 of 16

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218110&cellId=18860... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2218110 Page 14 of 16

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218110&cellId=18860... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2218110 Page 15 of 16

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218110&cellId=18860... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2218110 Page 16 of 16

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2218110&cellId=18860... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2741888 Page 1 of 3

2014 Holden VF Sedan | VF/WN - Sedan, Sportwagon, Ute, Caprice, SS, HSV Accessory Installation Manual | Accessories |
Climate Control | Accessories | Document ID: 2741888

Passenger Compartment Air Filter Package Installation


TOOLS REQUIRED:

Trim Removal tool

Fitting Instructions

Important: Once the pollen filter has been installed, the filter must be replaced in accordance
with the vehicle maintenance schedule.

NOTE: Subsequent filters may be fitted following steps 1 through 5 at which point the new
replacement pollen filter can be twisted to insert into position.

1. Open the vehicle bonnet.

2. From the passenger side of the vehicle, peel back the bonnet seal strip to the end of the
passenger side plenum cover. Refer to Figure 1.

© 2014 General Motors. All rights reserved.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2741888&cellId=18855... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2741888 Page 2 of 3

3. Refer to Figure 2 for the following:


3.1. Remove the scrivets (1) along the front edge of the plenum cover (2) and pull
upwards to release the cover retaining clips from the vehicle. Remove the cover.
3.2. Clean away leaves and debris from in the filter housing.
3.3. Use a pair of long nose pliers and side cutters to carefully break up and remove the
original leaf screen filter (3).

4. Refer to Figure 3 for the following:


Important: The pollen filter is directional and must be installed with the arrow on the
base of the filter pointing to the HVAC unit.
4.1. Twist to collapse the replacement pollen filter (1), ensure the arrows on the base of
the filter are pointing to the HVAC unit and position the filter in the retaining grooves
(2).
4.2. Release the twist in the filter and seat the filter in the top retaining grooves.

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2741888&cellId=18855... 12/07/2014
Document ID: 2741888 Page 3 of 3

4.3. Confirm the filter is seated correctly along all sides.

5. Clean the top surface of plenum (1) and apply the adhesive label (2) parallel to the holes in
the plenum cover. Refer to Figure 4.

Passenger Compartment Air Filter Package Installation

PARTS LIST

PART No DESCRIPTION QUANTITY

92420322 POLLEN FILTER 1

LABEL 1

92420323 FITTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

https://gsi.ext.gm.com/gsi/showDoc.do?laborOpCode=&docSyskey=2741888&cellId=18855... 12/07/2014

S-ar putea să vă placă și